Chrysler - 300 - Owners Manual - 2008 - 2008

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 7 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents. You are urged to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings. When it comes to service, remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in your satisfaction. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a complete listing of all subjects. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner manual: INTRODUCTION 5 1 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures, which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title. VIN LOCATION NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN. INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death. 1 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ FOB With Integrated Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Tip Start Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 䡵 Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Customer Key (FOB) Programming . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .25 䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .48 䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 ▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . .50 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .51 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 ▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .52 ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 ▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .76 䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert the double-sided integrated key into the ignition switch with either side up. Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the detented ON position. Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Fob with Integrated Key The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the Fob. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead. The valet key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking. 2 To remove the valet key from the Fob, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other hand. Valet Key Removal NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up. 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. Ignition Key Removal Place the selector lever in “P” (Park). Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key. NOTE: • For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. WARNING! Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Key-In-Ignition Reminder If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key. NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position. SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses the factory-mated Fob with Integrated Key and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2) seconds if someone uses an invalid Fob to start the engine. After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to 2 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two (2) seconds. If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. NOTE: • The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. • Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Fobs, or any other transponder-equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the Fob being used to start the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system. All of the Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Replacement Keys NOTE: Only Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. CAUTION! Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit PIN number. Keep the PIN in a secure THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 location. This number is required for dealer replacement of Fobs. Duplication of Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Fob is one, which has never been programmed. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle Fobs with you to the dealer. Customer Key (Fob) Programming If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure: 1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key. 2. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key. 3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing, turn on again for 3 seconds, and then turn off. The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer for details. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed. General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visual signals: the horn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lights will flash; and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash. Rearming of the System: If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after 3 minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the system will rearm itself. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Arm the System: Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is closed, or if all doors are closed, the system will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator light will flash. If it does not illuminate, the system is not arming. Also, if you open a door during the arming period, the system will cancel the arming process. If you wish to rearm the system after closing the door, you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences. To Disarm the System: Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position. NOTE: • The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the system. • The system remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the system. If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound. • When the system is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the system. 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system. Tamper Alert If something has triggered the system in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you disarm the system. Check the vehicle for tampering. ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if so equipped). For details, refer to “Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal & Approach Lighting” under “Mirrors” in Section 3 of this manual. The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position. NOTE: • None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are turned on manually. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 35 feet (11 meters) using a hand held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. NOTE: Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters will THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 continue to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all transmitter buttons for all Fobs. To unlock the doors: Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within 5 seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: Keyless Entry Transmitter • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for details. 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure: 1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button. 2. Release both buttons at the same time. 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position, and the key removed. Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock,” under ⬙Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for details. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button. 2. Release both buttons at the same time. 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position, and the key removed. 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). For details, refer to “Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. To lock the doors: Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for details. • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps: 1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button. 2. Release both buttons at the same time. 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position, and the key removed. 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. To unlatch the trunk: Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times within 5 seconds to unlatch the trunk. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Using The Panic Alarm: To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on. The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater. NOTE: • The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the panic alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on. • You may need to be less than 35 feet (11 meters) from the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the panic alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system. Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key (Fob) Programming.” (See page 17 for more information.) If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact your dealer for details. Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery. NOTE: • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board. 1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the Fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door. 2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. 3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place. General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Battery Replacement NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 If your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions. How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years. • Gear selector lever in “P” (Park). 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. • Hood closed. REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a targeted range of 328 ft. (100 m). NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. • Doors closed. • Trunk closed. • Hazard switch off. • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed). • Ignition key removed from ignition switch. • Battery at an acceptable charge level. • RKE Panic button not pressed. 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the Remote Start button on the RKE transmitter twice within 5 seconds. The parking lights will flash and horn will honk twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. NOTE: • The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode. • For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if so equipped) is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. To Exit Remote Start Mode & Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position. NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle. To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start Mode Press and release the remote start button one time. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system will disable the one-time press of the remote start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request. 2 DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward. Door Lock Plunger If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition, and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the key in the vehicle. Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, the key is in the ignition, and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key. Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met: 1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled. 2. The transmission is in gear. 3. All doors are closed. 4. The throttle is pressed. 5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h). 6. The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows: • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for details. • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing the following procedure: 1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch. 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position. 3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors. 4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming. 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws. Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if: 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled. 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h). 3. The transmission is in “N” (Neutral) or “P” (Park). 4. The driver door is opened. 5. The doors were not previously unlocked. 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h). Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows: • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for details. • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing the following procedure: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition. 2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position. 3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors. 4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming. 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws. Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system. To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1. Open the rear door. 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. Insert the tip of the valet key or alike into the child lock control and pull it upward. NOTE: When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged. Child Lock Control 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door. NOTE: • After engaging the child protection door lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 • For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle. 2 To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 1. Open the rear door. 2. Insert the tip of the valet key or alike into the child lock control and pull it downward. Child Lock Control 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door. NOTE: After disengaging the child protection door lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver’s door control all the door windows. There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. WARNING! Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. Power Window Switches Auto Down Feature The driver door power window switch, and some model passenger door power window switches have an auto THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To open the window part way, press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. Auto Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. NOTE: • If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually. WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing. Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press and release the window lock button (setting it in the down position). To enable the window controls, press and release the window lock button again (setting it in the up position). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 1. Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open. Window Lockout Switch Reset Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected, or goes dead, the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the auto-up feature, perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored: Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release Button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. NOTE: The transmission must be in “P” (Park) before the switch will operate. The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the trunk button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within 5 seconds. With the ignition switch in the ON position, the trunk open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed. With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or the key removed from the ignition switch, the trunk open symbol will display until the trunk is closed. Trunk Release Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING Trunk Emergency Release WARNING! 2 Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid, near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk. 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, the front airbags for both the driver and front passenger, the optional supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window, and the optional supplemental front-seat-mounted side airbags. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. WARNING! In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/Shoulder Belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. WARNING! • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best. • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/ shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap. Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING! • A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle • A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your dealer and have it fixed. 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. Removing Slack From Belt 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best. 2 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage, try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position. 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision. These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (refer to information on Airbags in this section). Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert姞) If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). BeltAlert威 Programming The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps: NOTE: DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威). 1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat belt. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step. NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled. 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract the seat belt. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure. NOTE: When the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) is deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled. Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt. Use The Automatic Locking Mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Seat belts that have the Automatic Locking Mode feature have a distinctive label on the webbing. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender, and store it. WARNING! Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed. 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers. Front Airbag Components NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity. WARNING! • Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them. You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional. These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc. This vehicle may also be equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window and/or supplemental front-seatmounted side airbags. If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG. 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Window Airbag NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment. If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental front-seatmounted side airbags, they are marked with an SRS label sewn into the outboard side of the seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING! • If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front-seatmounted side airbags, do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the seat airbags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. • If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front-seatmounted side airbags, do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door. The inflating seat airbag could drive the object into occupants, causing serious injury. • If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions. • If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the curtain airbags. Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side curtain and seat airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions, the front airbags will deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions. For vehicles so equipped, the supplemental side curtain airbag and front-seat-mounted side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle will also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions. However, even in collisions where the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you properly. 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag. 1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled up in the rear seat. 2. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position. 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to information on Child Restraint in this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. 4. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 5. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this section). 6. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 7. All occupants should use their seat belts properly. 8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate. 9. If your vehicle has supplemental side curtain airbags and/or supplemental front-seat-mounted side airbags, do not lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 10. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section in this manual. WARNING! • Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags. • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • If the vehicle has supplemental side curtain airbags and/or supplemental front-seat-mounted side airbags, they also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Air Bag System Components The airbag system consists of the following: • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) • Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (if equipped) • Airbag Warning Light • Driver Airbag • Front Passenger Airbag • Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows (if equipped) • Supplemental Front-Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (if equipped) • Steering Wheel and Column • Instrument Panel • Interconnecting Wiring • Seat Belt Reminder Light • Knee Impact Bolsters • Front Acceleration Sensors • Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How The Airbag System Works • The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not detect roll over. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 • For vehicles so equipped, The ORC also determines if a side impact is severe enough to deploy the supplemental side curtain airbag and/or supplemental frontseat-mounted side airbag as required for each type of impact. • The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and they will not inflate. • The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds as a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up. WARNING! Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right away. • The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way, as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. • The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag. • The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC (with side impact option) detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9 cm) thick when it is inflated. • The Supplemental Front-Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC (with side impact option) detects a collision requiring the front-seat-mounted side airbag to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front-seat-mounted side airbag. The inflating front-seat-mounted side airbag pushes through the seam in the seat’s trim cover and opens into the space between the occupant and the door. The airbag inflates at a very high speed and with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the front-seatmounted side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The following requirements must be strictly adhered to: • Do not make any modifications to the front seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover in any way. • Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle. • Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover. • Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.威 • At no time should any supplemental restraint system (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.威 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver or front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS). If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and then to immediately deflate. NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system. This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system. If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur: • The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. • As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. • It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING! Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment, with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following functions: • Cuts off fuel to the engine. • Flashes hazard lights. • Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed. • Unlocks the doors automatically. NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame. • You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags. NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate. Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in an impact. While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system promptly: • The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. • The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval. • The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Event Data Recorder (EDR) In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable. used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations. NOTE: 1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment. In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes 2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be recorded (e.g., loss of battery power). In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the US government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when: 1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2. Used in defense of litigation DaimlerChrysler Corporation product involving a Data Parameters that May Be Recorded: • Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status for electronically-controlled safety systems, including the airbag system • Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped) • ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage) • Airbag deployment level (if applicable) • Impact acceleration and angle • Seat belt status • Brake status (service and parking brakes) 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant • Accelerator status (including vehicle speed) 4. Otherwise required by law • Engine control status (including engine speed) • Transmission gear selection THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 • Cruise control status • Traction/stability control status • Tire pressure monitoring system status (if equipped) Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child: Infants and Child Restraints • Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and “convertible” child seats. • The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section. • Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position. Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 than one year. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section. Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt. • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. • The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible. • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. NOTE: For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant. Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint: • Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it. • The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits. • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it. • Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer’s directions. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle. All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system. The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back, and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces. LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seat back and the rear window. These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it. Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. NOTE: • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap. • When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle. 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a distinctive label on the seat belt webbing. The seat belt must be in the automatic locking mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” in this section for details. A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing back in. Tighten webbing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out. If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position. To attach a child restraint tether strap: 1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint. 2 Tether Strap Mounting 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. 3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap. WARNING! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered as a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING! It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Lock Your Vehicle Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a well-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed. 2 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO) follow the safety tips below. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, WARNING! • If you are required to drive with the trunk open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt. Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 3 䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 ▫ Tilt In Reverse Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . .89 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 ▫ Power Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 ▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 ▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .90 ▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If Equipped . .88 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal & Approach Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ▫ Power Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ▫ Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Linking & Unlinking The Remote Keyless Transmitter To The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . 125 ▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . . 127 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ▫ Automatic Headlights – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 131 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . 132 ▫ SmartBeams — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 䡵 Headlight Washers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 142 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 ▫ Multi-Function Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . . 136 䡵 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 147 䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 ▫ Electronic Speed Control Operation . . . . . . . . 149 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 ▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . 139 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 140 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 3 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ▫ Display Warnings & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 165 䡵 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . . 168 ▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . 154 ▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . 154 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 ▫ To Set a Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 ▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 ▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 ▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . 159 ▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . 162 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 䡵 Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 172 䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 ▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 177 ▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 ▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 181 ▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 ▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink威 Button . . 182 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 ▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 ▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 188 ▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 䡵 Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ▫ Front Seat Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ▫ Rear Seat Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 ▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 ▫ Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 䡵 Load Leveling System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 193 3 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night Mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window. A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment. Adjusting Rearview Mirror Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward windshield). Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light, next to the button, will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle. WARNING! Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. 3 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions, full forward, full rearward, and normal. Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Inside Rearview Mirror. This feature is also available on the passenger outside mirror of mirrors equipped with turn signal and approach lighting. Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal & Approach Lighting — If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are located in the upper outer corner of each mirror. Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the hazard flashers will also activate these LEDs. The fourth (uppermost) LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors. The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position. NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the gear selector lever is moved out of the “P” (Park) position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Tilt in Reverse Feature — If Equipped The ⬙Tilt in Reverse⬙ feature tilts the outside rearview mirrors downward when the ignition switch is to the ON position and the transmission is in the “R” (Reverse) position. This feature provides the driver with a better view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of “R” (Reverse). The ⬙Tilt in Reverse⬙ feature can be enabled or disabled through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. Power Remote Control Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position. After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position. 3 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window Defrost. Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights. Power Mirror Control NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for details. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect™ system. Illuminated Vanity Mirror HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The sales code RER radio contains an integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™) system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for UConnect™ system operating instructions for this radio. NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ version 0.96 or higher. See UConnect™ website for supported phones. NOTE: For UConnect™ customer support, visit the following web sites: • www.chrysler.com/uconnect • www.dodge.com/uconnect • www.jeep.com/uconnect • or call 1–877–855–8400 3 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation. The UConnect™ phone book enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name. Each language has a separate 32-name phone book accessible only in that language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped). Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system (depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped), and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons (Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button) that will enable you to access the system. Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio. The individual buttons are described in the “Operation” section. The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See UConnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details. • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another prompt. The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™ system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped. • For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then ⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙ The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on certain radios. Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™ system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu structure. Voice commands are required after most UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options. • For each feature explanation in this section, only the combined form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command, when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands: ⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you. 3 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Command Tree Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section. Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following the beep. The UConnect™ system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help. To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply press the “Phone” button and follow audible prompts for directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a press of the “Phone” button on the radio control head. Cancel Command At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu. Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone. To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. The UConnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing. The following are general phone to UConnect™ System pairing instructions: • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙ • When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts. • You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number, which you will later need to enter into your cellular. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process. • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name. • You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time, only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™ system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙). Dial by Saying a Number • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Dial.⬙ • System will prompt you to say the number you want call. • For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination. Based on the country in which the vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest valid phone number has ten digits. 3 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios. • The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios. Call by Saying a Name Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook • Press the “Phone” button to begin. NOTE: Adding names to phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say “Call.⬙ • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙ • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone book. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the phone book. • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙ UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., ⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry, if desired. • When prompted, recite the phone number for the phone book entry that you are adding. After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu. The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phone book with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phone book accessible only in that language. Phonebook Download UConnect™ allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth. To use this feature, press the “Phone” button and say “Phonebook Download.” System prompts “Ready to accept vcard entry via Bluetooth…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone owners’ manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone. NOTE: • Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature. • Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth, and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy. In this case, the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE the UConnect™ and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth. Please see your phone owners’ manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection. • If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will be use only the first 24 characters. Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook NOTE: Editing names in the phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion. • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙ • You will then be asked for the name of the phone book entry that you wish to edit. • Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit. • When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phone book entry that you are editing. After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book, you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu. ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature. Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook NOTE: Editing phone book entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion. • Press the “Phone” button to begin. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙ • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phone book entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phone book from which you choose. To select one of the entries from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙ • After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will ask you which designation you wish to delete, home, work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you wish to delete. • Note that only the phone book entry in the current language is deleted. Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙ • The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. • After confirmation, the phone book entries will be deleted. • Note that only the phone book in the current language is deleted. List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙ 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the phone book entries. • To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired name, and say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point. • The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call. • The selected number will be dialed. Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have. Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press ’Phone’ button to accept the call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected. Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it. Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call.⬙ Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the “Phone” button until you hear a single beep. Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the “Phone” button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one time. Conference Call When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the “Phone” button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call. Three-Way Calling To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recognition” button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE established, press and hold the “Phone” button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call. Call Termination To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “Phone” button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the “Phone” button until you hear a single beep. • The UConnect™ system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone. NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system. Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types: • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Redial.⬙ • After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after Redial UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect™ system to the mobile phone. • An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off. UConnect™ System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect™ system is using, • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to (English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped). • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection. After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language. NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phone book is usable. The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages. Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area. If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system is operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows: • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA. 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area. The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly. Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system. Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance, • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Towing Assistance.⬙ NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card. Paging To learn how to page refer to ⬙Working with Automated Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time-out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect™ system. Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working with Automated Systems.⬙ UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system. You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging service or automated customer service. Some services require immediate response selection, in some instances, that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system. When calling a number with your UConnect™ system that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager. You can also send stored UConnect™ phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and say “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the name or number, say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. The UConnect™ will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone. NOTE: • You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations, this is normal. • Some paging and voicemail systems have system timeout settings too short that may not allow the use of this feature. 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Barge In - Overriding Prompts The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately. For example, if a prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear aѧ,⬙ you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt. Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming, network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc. Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™ system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition. • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio. Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off) When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the UConnect™ system: • Press the “Voice Recognition” button. • Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙ In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system: • Press the “Voice Recognition” button. • Following the beep, say ⬙Mute-off.⬙ Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™ system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙ Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙ with one electronic device at a time. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user’s manual. 3 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE List Paired Cellular Phone Names • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing.” • When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙ • The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone being announced, press the “Voice Recognition” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone. Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system that you want to use it with. • You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button anytime while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select. • The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately within 30 feet) the vehicle. Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones • Press the “Phone” button to begin. • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙ UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 • At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the prompts. From outside the UConnect™ mode (e.g. from radio mode) • You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button anytime while the list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete. • Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for 5 seconds until the session begins, or, Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™ System UConnect™ Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the “Phone” button and say “UConnect™ Tutorial.” Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect™ system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training mode, follow one of the two procedures: • Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect™ system. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts. 3 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Recognition (VR) • fully closed windows, • For best performance, adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least 1⁄2 inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror. • dry weather condition. • Always wait for the beep before speaking. • Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some. • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet away from you. • When navigating through an automated system, such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙ • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period. • Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in motion is recommended. • Performance is maximized under: • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect™ phone book. • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise, • smooth road surface, • UConnect™ phone book nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phone book. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 • You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙ • Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported. • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the UConnect™ system. • Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down. • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down. Far End Audio Performance • Audio quality is maximized under: • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, • low road noise, • smooth road surface, • fully closed windows, and • dry weather condition. • operation from driver seat. Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode. Power-Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least five (5) seconds prior to using the system. 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Primary zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star (*) plus (+) pound (#) add location all Voice Commands Alternate(s) Voice Commands Primary Alternate(s) call cancel confirmation prompts. continue delete dial download edit emergency English erase all Espanol Francais help home 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Primary language list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry no pager pair a phone phone pairing phonebook previous record again redial Voice Commands Alternate(s) pairing phone book Voice Commands Primary Alternate(s) return to main menu return or main menu select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up towing assistance transfer call UConnect™ Tutorial try again voice training work yes UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. 3 • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. SEATS Power Seats The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat. The passenger’s seat will move up or down, forward or rearward. Power Seat Switch 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. Power Reclining Seats The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the seat. CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Power Seat Recline Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support. Lumbar Support Control Lever 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise it, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower it, depress the button on the post guide and push downward on the head restraint. Adjustable Head Restraint Heated Seats — If Equipped Heated seats, which are available only with leather upholstery, provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 The controls for the driver and front passenger heated seats are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel. 3 Rear Heated Seat Switch Front Heated Seat Switch On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console. After turning on the ignition, you and your passenger(s) can choose from High, Off, or Low heat settings. Amber LEDs in the switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two LEDs will illuminate for high, one for low, and none for off. 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Press the switch once to select high-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select low-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut off the heating elements. If high-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. WARNING! Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Folding Rear Seat When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. WARNING! • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. Folding Rear Seats The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in use. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in an accident. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets. The memory switch is located on the driver’s door panel. The switch contains an (S) button to activate the memory save function. It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number (1) and the number (2). The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two preprogrammed memory profiles by pressing the appropriate side of the switch. Memory Switch Programming The Memory Feature To create a new memory profile, perform the following: NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e. seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets). 2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (1) within 5 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped will display which memory position is being set. If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into memory as follows: 1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e. seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets). 2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (2) within 5 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped will display which memory position is being set. NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in Park, but the vehicle must be in Park to recall a memory profile. NOTE: The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. Linking & Unlinking the Remote Keyless Transmitter to the Memory Feature Your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter. 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To program your transmitters, perform the following: Memory Position Recall 1. Remove key from ignition. NOTE: The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in Park, a message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. 2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2. 3. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory switch, then press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. ⬙Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). 4. Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter within 10 seconds. NOTE: Your transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the Set (S) button followed by the UNLOCK button on the transmitter in Step 4 above. To recall the memory settings for driver one, press memory button number 1 on the driver’s door or the “Unlock” button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 1. To recall the memory setting for driver two, press memory button number 2 on the driver’s door or the “Unlock” button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 2. A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the drivers door during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected. Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat Only) This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch. • When you remove the key from the ignition switch, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position. • When you remove the key from the ignition switch, the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inch (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 inches and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position. • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position. NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). For 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE details, refer to “Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. Hood Release Lever Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approximately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. WARNING! If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision. You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving. Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in the open position. 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog lights. Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light, and instrument panel light operation. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Automatic Headlights – If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights ON or OFF according to ambient light levels. To turn the system ON, rotate the headlight switch counter-clockwise to the AUTO (A) position. When the system is ON, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also ON. This means the headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System OFF, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO (A) position. 3 Headlight Switch NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come ON in the Automatic mode. 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual. SmartBeams — If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. To Activate: 1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual. 2. Rotate the headlight switch counter-clockwise to the AUTO (A) position. 3. Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to switch the headlights to the HIGH BEAM position. NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 25 mph (40 km/h). UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 To Deactivate: Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the SmartBeam system. 1. Pull the Multi-Function Lever toward you to switch the headlights from the HIGH BEAM to the LOW BEAM position. 2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO (A) to the ON position. NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlighted area. To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If you turn the headlights, park lights, or ignition switch on again, the system will cancel the delay. If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner. NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature. 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). For details, refer to “Delay Turning Headlights Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights, whenever the ignition switch is on, the headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving. Lights-on Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened. Fog Lights — If Equipped The front fog light switch is on the headlight switch below the dimmer control. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the fog light switch. An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights. Multi-Function Lever The multi-function lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. The lever is located on the left side of the steering column. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Moving the Multi-Function Lever up or down also causes the corresponding turn signal indicator in the outside mirror (if so equipped) to flash. For details, refer to “Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal & Approach Lighting” under “Mirrors” in this section. You can also signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent. Releasing the lever at the detent will provide 3 flashes. Multi-Function Lever Turn Signals Move the Multi-Function Lever up or down and the corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. If either indicator has a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, see your authorized dealer for service. NOTE: A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever towards you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam. Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released. Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn OFF the light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent. Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 because a door is open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch. Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch, and is located on the left side of the instrument panel. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if so equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets and cup holders. Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position. Interior light Defeat (OFF) Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom “OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open. Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped, and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on. 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multi-function lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Rotate the end of the multi-function lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for Low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for High-speed wiper operation. CAUTION! Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than OFF. Windshield Wiper/Washer Control Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are six delay settings, which allow you to regulate UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 30 seconds between cycles. WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use. Mist Feature Push the multi-function lever inward (toward the steering column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever. Windshield Washers To use the washer, push the multi-function lever inward (toward the steering column) to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned OFF, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn OFF. Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual. Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multi-function lever to one of the six intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature. The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multi-function lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive. Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions. Choose setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity. Choose setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity. Place the lever in the OFF position when not using the system. NOTE: • The rain-sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the LOW or HIGH position. • The rain-sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield. • Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance. • The Rain Sense feature can be turned on and off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 The rain sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions: • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The rain-sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the outside temperature is below 32° F (0° C), unless the wiper control on the multi-function lever is moved, or the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above freezing. • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The rain-sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmission selector lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the multi-function lever is moved or the selector lever is moved out of the “N” (Neutral) position. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. 3 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. Washer Fluid Reservoir The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED The multi-function lever operates the headlight washers when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the headlights are ON. The multi-function lever is located on the left side of the steering column. To use the headlight washers, push the multi-function lever inward (toward the steering column) to the second detent and release it. The headlight washers will spray a timed high-pressure spray of washer fluid onto each UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 headlight lens. In addition, the windshield washers will spray the windshield and the windshield wipers will cycle. NOTE: The headlight washers will operate on the first spray of the windshield washer and then every fourth spray after that. Headlight Washer Adding Washer Fluid The headlight washer and windshield washer share the same fluid reservoir. The reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. 3 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. Washer Fluid Reservoir WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the control handle inward until fully engaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multi-function lever on the steering column. 3 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for details. WARNING! Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired. Moving the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat cushion side shield. 3 Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle). Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver). • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF. 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The pedals can be adjusted while driving. • The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. One of the following messages will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped if a pedal adjustment is attempted when the system is locked out: “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse.” NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for details. CAUTION! Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal’s path. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Electronic Speed Control Operation The speed control lever (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operated the system. To Activate: Push and release the (“ON/OFF”) button located on the end of the speed control lever. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the speed control system is ON. To turn the system OFF, push and release the (“ON/OFF”) button again. The system and the indicator light will turn off. WARNING! 1 2 3 4 — — — — CANCEL RESUME ACCEL ON/OFF SET DECEL Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it. 3 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Set At A Desired Speed: When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the lever down and release (“SET DECEL”). Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE: • Speed control will only function in third, fourth, or fifth gear when in the Autostick威 Mode (if equipped). • The speed control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact spare tire. To Deactivate: The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you: • Softly tap the brake pedal. • Depress the brake pedal. • Pull the speed control lever toward you (“CANCEL”). Pushing and releasing the (“ON/OFF”) button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory. To Resume Speed: If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the previous set speed. To do so, push the lever up and release (“RESUME ACCEL”), and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. To Vary the Speed Setting: When the speed control is set, you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the lever (“RESUME ACCEL”). When the lever is released, a new set speed will be established. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Tapping (“RESUME ACCEL”) once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc. To decrease speed while speed control is set, push down and hold the lever (“SET DECEL”). Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new set speed will be established. Tapping (“SET DECEL”) once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped, speed decreases. To Accelerate For Passing: Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Using Speed Control On Hills NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. The automatic transmission will downshift while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control. WARNING! Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, or slippery. 3 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes an infrared sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead in your path. NOTE: • If the sensor does not detect a vehicle directly ahead of you, ACC will function in the same way as a standard cruise control system. For additional information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in this section. • If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration automatically so that your vehicle maintains a preset following distance. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING! • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury. • The ACC system: − Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (i.e. a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). − Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes. − Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. − Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. − May not detect a vehicle ahead when strong light (for example, sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle. − Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop. WARNING! You should switch off the ACC system: • When driving in fog; heavy rain; heavy snow; sleet; heavy traffic; and complex driving situations (i.e. in highway construction zones). • When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes; and when towing a trailer. • When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury. 3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation The speed control lever (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system. Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h). When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “ACC READY.” When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “ACC OFF.” 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — DISTANCE SETTING CANCEL RESUME/ACCEL ON/OFF SET/DECEL NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions: • When you apply the brakes. • When the parking brake is set. • When the automatic transmission is in “P” (Park), “R” (Reverse), or “N” (Neutral). • When the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is switched off. • When pushing the RESUME ACCEL switch without a previously set speed in memory. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 To Activate: Push and release the (“ON/OFF”) button located on the end of the speed control lever. The ACC menu in the EVIC displays “ACC READY.” To turn the system OFF, push and release the (“ON/ OFF”) button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display “ACC OFF.” WARNING! Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it. 3 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Set a Desired Speed: When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the lever down and release (“SET DECEL”). The EVIC will display the set speed. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs: • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the EVIC. • The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 To Cancel: The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if: • You softly tap the brake pedal. 3 • You depress the brake pedal. • You pull the speed control lever toward you (“CANCEL”). • The Electronic Stability Program / Traction Control System (ESP/TCS) activates. To Turn Off: The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if: • You push and release the (“ON/OFF”) button. • You turn off the ignition. • You switch off ESP. 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Resume Speed: Push the lever up and release (“RESUME ACCEL”), and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed. WARNING! The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. This could cause an accident and/or serious injury. To Vary the Speed Setting: While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by lifting and holding the lever up (“RESUME ACCEL”). If the lever is continually held, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments until the lever is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display. Tapping the lever up once will result in a 1 mph (Canada 1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph (Canada 1 km/h). While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing and holding the lever down (“SET DECEL”). If the lever is continually held, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments until the lever is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Tapping the lever down once will result in a 1 mph (Canada 1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph (Canada 1 km/h). NOTE: • When you use the lever to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle. Setting the Following Distance in ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between long, medium, and short. Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC. • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. 1 — Sensor Bars. Default Distance Setting is Three Bars = Long. 3 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE You can change the distance setting by pushing the lever away from you and release (“DISTANCE”). Each time this is done, the distance setting toggles between long, medium, and short. The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed. If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed. • The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph (24 km/h) and the system automatically disables itself. • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor. • The distance setting is changed. • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation). The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert (“ATTENTION”) will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. 3 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The information it displays depends on ACC system status. Press the Menu button (located on the steering wheel) repeatedly until one of the following displays in the EVIC: Menu Button ACC OFF − When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “ACC OFF.” UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 ACC READY ACC SET − When ACC is activated, the display will read “ACC READY.” − When ACC is set, the set speed will display. 3 1 2 3 4 — — — — Sensed Vehicle Indicator Set Speed Your Vehicle Following Distance Setting: Three Bars = Long; Two Bars = Medium; One Bar = Short. 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set. The ACC SET screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following: • Set speed change • Distance setting change • System cancel • Acquisition/loss of Target • Driver override • System off • Proximity warning • ACC warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after 5 seconds of no ACC activity. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Display Warnings & Maintenance ACC Blinded Warning The ACC Blinded Warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow, fog, heavy rain, or when driving into direct sunlight (sunrise or sunset). The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC Blinded.” 3 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the grille, slightly offset from the center of the grille. • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens. • Do not remove any screws from the sensor or the sensor mount. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment. • If the sensor is damaged due to an accident, see your authorized dealer for service. • Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction. ACC Sensor Location To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items: When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the “ACC Off” state and will resume function by simply reactivating it. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation. ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays ⬙ACC UNAVAILABLE,⬙ there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. In this case, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer. 3 Service ACC Warning If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “SERVICE ACC,” it indicates there is an internal system fault that requires service from an authorized dealer. 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Precautions While Driving with ACC In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene. Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. Turns and Bends In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Using ACC on Hills When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited. ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of dramatic hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. 3 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lane Changing ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it will not until it may be too late to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. Stationary Objects and Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. 3 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Classification Specifications: 21 C.F.R part 1040.10 & 1040.11 DIN EN 60825-1:2003 IEC 60825-1:2001 REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist System is a driver aid that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle. Refer to the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes in this section for system limitations and usage recommendations. The Rear Park Assist System is active when the driver shifts the transmission into the “R” (Reverse) position, and the parking brake is not applied, and the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h). When the vehicle is in PARK, the system can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper to scan for obstacles up to 59 inches (150 cm) away from the rear bumper fascia. The warning display located above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window. The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: Rear Park Assist Indicator 3 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED 1st LED 2nd LED 3rd LED 4th LED 5th LED 6th LED 7th LED 8th LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 59 in. (150 cm) 47 in. (120 cm) 39 in. (100 cm) 31.5 in. (80 cm) 31.5 in. (80 cm) 25.5 in. (65 cm) 25.5 in. (65 cm) 20 in. (50 cm) 20 in. (50 cm) 16 in. (40 cm) 16 in. (40 cm) 6 in. (15 cm) 12 in. (30 cm) NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Red None None None None None None at 12 in. (30 cm) Intermittent at 8 in. (20 cm) Continuous Red UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 WARNING! CAUTION! • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. • The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist System. 3 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly. • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system. If “Service Park Assist System” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer. OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights, an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink威), storage for sunglasses, and an optional power sunroof switch. Overhead Console Courtesy/Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/ reading lights. Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time to turn off the light. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent. NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design. Push the raised bar on the compartment door to open. Push the raised bar to close. GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off of your vehicle’s battery. WARNING! 3 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. Programming HomeLink姞 Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons, erase all channels before you begin training. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC message states “CHANNELS CLEARED.” 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (3–8 cm) from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view. For optimal training, point the battery end of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink威. 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.” UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Then release both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons. If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter. It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open & close while you train. NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step #3 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section. 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAINING” repeat Step 3. NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.” 3 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “learn” or “training” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is NOT the button normally used to open & close the door). 1 — Garage Door Opener 2 — Training Button 6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training” button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the “Learn” button has been pressed. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for 2 seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete. If the device does not activate, press the button a third time (for 2 seconds) to complete the training. If you are have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. Gate Operator/Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor. If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming HomeLink” Step 3 with the following: 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button while you press and release - every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威 has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.” If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in at this time. 3 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink.” earlier in this section. Using HomeLink姞 To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink姞 Button To re-program a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL # TRAINING.” Do not release the button. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with PROGRAMMING HOMELINK Step #2 and follow all remaining steps. Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here are some of the most common solutions: • Replace the battery in the original transmitter. • Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code. • Did you unplug the device for training, and remember to plug it back in? If you are have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. 3 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console. WARNING! • Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too. Power Sunroof Controls • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Opening Sunroof - Express Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called Express Open. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Closing Sunroof - Express Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called Express Close. During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close. Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing, press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position. NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed. Venting Sunroof - Express Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button in the center of the switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, which operates regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. 3 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed. ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse. NOTE: If desired, the power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if equipped) can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. 3 The 12-volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package) has power available only when the ignition is on. This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit. WARNING! Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could result. Front Power Outlet 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The center console outlet is powered directly from the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent engine starting. Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.); will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. Center Console Power Outlet • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 CUP HOLDERS Front Seat Cup Holders The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the center console. Front Seat Cup Holders Rear Seat Cup Holders The rear seat cup holders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cup holders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows. 3 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Console Features The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items. For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio, the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control, which holds up to four CD jewel cases. Without Vehicle Entertainment System (VES) Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest. Rear Seat Cup Holders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12-volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the left and right side of the top compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptops, cell phones, or other electrical equipment. The console’s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments. 1 — Release button for bottom compartment 2 — Release button for top compartment 3 — Top Compartment 4 — Bottom Compartment. You can access this compartment directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by operating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the armrest down. With Vehicle Entertainment System (VES) The center console contains a large storage compartment. The storage compartment contains a 12-volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the top left and right side of the storage compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the compartment with the lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptops, cell phones, or other electrical equipment. The console’s 3 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE front-opening lid allows for easy access to the storage compartment for the both the driver and the front passenger. Cargo Area The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly flat extension of the load floor. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. WARNING! • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback in not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in an accident. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. • To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 WARNING! • The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle: • Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway. • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision. LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions. A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions. If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset the system. 3 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 ▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 䡵 Base Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ▫ Telephone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 䡵 Premium Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 ▫ Navigation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . 227 䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 ▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 ▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 ▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 ▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 ▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 䡵 Sales Code REN — Multimedia System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 ▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 ▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 ▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 ▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 237 ▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . . 245 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . . 247 ▫ List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . 250 ▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . 250 䡵 Sales Code RER — Multimedia System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 ▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio . . . . . 253 ▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 ▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 ▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 256 ▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 ▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 ▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode . . . . . . 270 ▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 ▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 267 ▫ Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES威) (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 ▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 267 䡵 Video Entertainment System — If Equipped . . . . 272 䡵 Satellite Radio (RSC) — If Equipped (REQ And RES Radios Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 ▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 ▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 ▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 ▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio Buttons . . . 275 ▫ Selecting Satellite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 ▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 4 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 279 䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 281 䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 ▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 ▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 293 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 4 1 2 3 4 5 — Air Outlet — Instrument Cluster — Hazard Switch — Analog Clock — Electronic Stability Program Off Button* / Traction Control System Off Button* 6 — Glove Box 7 — Radio 8 — Climate Control 9 — Heated Seat Switch* 10 — Power Outlet 11 — Ash Tray* 16 — Headlight Switch 12 — Storage Compartment* * If Equipped 13 — Ignition Switch 14 — Hood Release 15 — Trunk Release Switch 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 4 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1. Electronic Speed Control/Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will turn on when the electronic speed control or ACC is ON. (See page 148 for more information.) (See page 152 for more information.) 2. Low Fuel Indicator Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. (See page 369 for more information.) 3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This light will turn on when the front fog lights are ON. (See page 134 for more information.) 4. Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. NOTE: A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. NOTE: Check for a defective outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.(See page 135 for more information.) 5. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed. 6. Odometer/Trip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional information. NOTE: vehicle vehicle reading U.S. federal regulations require upon transfer of ownership, the seller certify the mileage the has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer is changed because of repair or replacement, be UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined. On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Cluster, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions exist. (See page 213 for more information.) Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). (See page 417 for more information.) Change Oil Message (Base Cluster) Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset 4 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine). 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. 7. Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each gear range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area. 8. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound to warn of an overheated engine condition. When this light turns on, the engine temperature is critically hot. The vehicle should be turned off immediately and serviced as soon as possible. (See page 393 for more information.) 9. Anti-Lock Brake Light — If Equipped This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. (See page 325 for more information.) 10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light The yellow ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The light should go out with the engine running. The system will turn this light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both. (See page 331 for more information.) 11. Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is either not on during starting, or stays on, or turns on while driving, then have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. (See page 64 for more information.) 12. Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system (if equipped). The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a failure. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is 4 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers due to a change in fluid level. If so, the vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked. Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). Both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light will turn on in the event of an EBD failure. Immediate repair of the ABS system is required in the event of an EBD failure. The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the LOCK position to the ON position. The light should turn on for approximately two seconds and then turn off. The light will remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake fault is detected. If the parking brake is not applied and the light remains on, or if the light does not turn on, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. NOTE: The light will turn on when the ignition switch in the ON position and the parking brake is applied. This UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. (See page 324 for more information.) 13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light — If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP. (See page 328 for more information.) (See page 331 for more information.) 14. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. 15. Trip Odometer Button Trip Odometer Button — Base Cluster The word ⬙TRIP⬙ will appear when this button is pressed. Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the trip odometer displays to reset it to 0 miles (kilometers). A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer. Trip Odometer Button — Premium Cluster Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B” will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles (kilometers). The odometer must be in trip mode to reset it. 16. High Beam Light This light will turn on when the high beam headlights are ON. Push the Multi-Function lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam. (See page 134 for more information.) 17. Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 18. Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving. (See page 49 for more information.) 19. Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) Indicator Light — If Equipped The VSA indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is arming, and slowly when the VSA is armed. (See page 18 for more information.) 20. Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position. 21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check when the ignition switch is turned ON. This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system. If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible, place the gear selector in park, and cycle the ignition key. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see your dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. In this case, you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing. Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting. 4 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. (See page 355 for more information.) CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. 23. Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while 4 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices (i.e. radio) or slightly increase engine speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. 24. Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the light does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. (See page 417 for more information.) 25. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A single chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in section 7. (See page 421 for more information.) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED mounted buttons (described in this section) are also equipped with the EVIC. The EVIC consists of the following: • System Status • Vehicle information warning message displays • Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped) • Personal Settings (customer programmable features) • Compass display • Outside temperature display • Trip computer functions Electronic Vehicle Information Center The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located in the upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and tachometer. Vehicles equipped with steering wheel • UConnect™ hands-free communication system displays (if equipped) • Navigation system screens (if equipped) • Audio mode display 4 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel: Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System MENU Status, Personal Settings, and Telephone (if Button equipped). Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote sound system conFUNC- trol. For details, refer to “Remote Sound SysTION tem Controls” in this section. SELECT Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System Status Messages, and Personal Settings (CusSCROLL tomer Programmable Features). The SCROLL Button button also functions as a remote sound system control. For details, refer to “Remote Sound System Controls” in this section. Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with compass reading and outside temperature, this AUDIO screen will display radio and media mode MODE information depending on which radio is in the Button vehicle. For details, refer to “Remote Sound System Controls” in this section. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following messages: • Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with either turn signal on) • Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) • RKE Battery Low (with a single chime) • Memory #1/#2 Profile Set • Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall • Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In Park (with a single chime) • Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a single chime) • Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park • Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h]) • Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h]) • Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion) • Trunk Ajar (with a single chime) • Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime) 4 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • ACC Off — When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if so equipped). • ACC Ready — When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is activated. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if so equipped). • ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if so equipped). • Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after setting the desired speed in the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if so equipped). • Distance Set — After changing the desired following distance in the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, this message will display momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if so equipped). • Attention — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance, this message will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if so equipped). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 • ACC Blinded — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system deactivates due to performance limiting conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if so equipped). • ACC Unavailable — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system turns off due to a temporary malfunction that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if so equipped). • Service ACC — If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system turns off due to an internal system fault that requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed information (if so equipped). • Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Cruise Engaged (with a single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats. • Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Vehicle In Reverse (with a single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats. • Channel # Transmit • Channel # Training • Channel # Trained • Clearing Channels • Channels Cleared • Did Not Train • Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. 4 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. • Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. • Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. • Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. • Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5 of this manual for more details) • Service Park Assist System (with a single chime) • Oil Change Required (with a single chime) Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure: UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine). 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC: • Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode • Distance To Empty • Trip A • Trip B • Elapsed Time • Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions. The Trip Functions mode displays the following information: • Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. Vehicles with the 5.7L Multi-Displacement System (MDS) may be equipped with the FUEL SAVER MODE in the Trip Functions of the EVIC. The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in 4 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the EVIC display. This message will appear whenever MDS allows the engine to operate on four cylinders, which will vary depending on driving habits and vehicle usage. can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase the time in which the fuel saver mode is active. 8 Cylinder Operation - MDS Off 4 Cylinder Operation - MDS On This feature allows you to monitor when the MDS switches off the fuel on four of the eight cylinders and it • Distance To Empty (DTE) Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button. • Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset. NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. • Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. • When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display. • Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset. • Display Units of Measure in: To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears. To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3 4 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL seconds of resetting the currently displayed function (>Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window). Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. Press and release the compass button to display one of eight comCOM- pass readings and the outside temperature. PASS Button Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows: 1. Turn on the ignition switch. 2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass” displays in the EVIC. 4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in the EVIC. 5. Complete one or more 360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message turns off. The compass will now function normally. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North. In some areas of the country, the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set using the following procedure: NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is located. 4 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. 2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance” message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC. 4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map. 5. Press and release the compass button to exit. Telephone — If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until “Telephone” displays in the EVIC. When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC provides the following telephone information: • Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery strength, and signal strength in increments of 20 percent. • Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air time in minutes and seconds, call ended, call failed, roaming, and no phone connection. • UConnect Active. • Caller ID phone number display. When the appropriate conditions exist, and if supported by the cell phone, the EVIC will display the following telephone symbols: The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the signal strength of the UConnect™ phone. The number of horizontal bars increases as the Signal strength of the UConnect™ phone signal inStrength creases. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an incoming call. Incoming Call The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that you have voice mail. Voice Mail The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect™ phone is currently in analog mode. Analog The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect™ phone is currently roaming. Roaming The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a text message. Text Message The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the battery strength of the UConnect™ phone. Battery Strength 4 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that a phone connection has been made. Call in Progress The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect™ phone is currently not available. Phone Not Available Navigation — If Equipped Navigation Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On, the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu. Turn By Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a programmed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn. NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instructions. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK. NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect™ language selection. Please refer to “Language Selection” in the HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) section of this manual for details. Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC. “Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 Km/h)” When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices: “Language” When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language. “Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit” When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the “P” (Park) or “N” (Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. 4 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL “Remote Key Unlock” When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears. “Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock” — If Equipped When ON is selected, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets. When OFF is selected, only the memory switch on the driver’s door panel will recall memory profiles. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for more information. “Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock” When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. “Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers” — If Equipped When ON is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press and release UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. When OFF is selected, the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation. “Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit” — If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under “Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for more information. “Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock” When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. “Headlights On with Wipers” (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. 4 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual. “Delay Turning Headlights Off” When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” appears. “Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse” — If Equipped When ON is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the transmission is in the “R” (Reverse) position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of “R” (Reverse). To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. “Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock” When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears. “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit” When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60 min.” appears. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 “Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If Equipped When ON is selected, all voice commands from the UConnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. “Display Units of Measure in” The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears. “Park Assist System” — If Equipped When ON is selected, the system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the “R” (Reverse) or “N” (Neutral) position. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. “Automatic High Beams” — If Equipped When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to “SmartBeams” in section 3 of this manual for more information. “Turn by Turn Navigation” — If Equipped When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. 4 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel, press and hold the button until the setting is correct. Analog Clock RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio signals. Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals... AM (Amplitude Modulation), in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to vary... and FM (Frequency Modulation), in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude, and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal. NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the radio, steering wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines and neon signs. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the radio, steering wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear, which is the major feature of FM radio. 4 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SALES CODE REN — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit’s faceplate. The REN multimedia system contains a radio, CD/DVD player, USB port, a 20 gigabyte Hard Drive (HDD), and a “JukeBox” (virtual CD changer). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5-inch touch screen allows for easy menu selection. A 20 gigabyte Hard Drive (HDD) allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port. While the Gracenote database finds the artist, track, and title for the music. An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System (VES), separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system’s wireless headphones. This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear-seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio. Other special features include direct tune, music type selections, easy store presets, backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and on some models a dual display screen operation. Refer to your Radio Specific User’s Manual for detailed operating instructions. Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If Equipped) Refer to your Radio Specific User’s Manual for detailed operating instructions. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped) Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instructions. 4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed. Clock Setting Procedure 5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. Setting the Clock 1. Turn on the system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed. Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected, this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the current setting: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 4 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are displayed to change the current setting. Show Time if Radio is Off When selected, this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current setting: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.” Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is Off” are displayed to change the current setting. Changing the Time Zone 1. Turn on the system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen. 4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu. 5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate. Operating Instructions - Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. REQ Radio SEEK Buttons (Radio Mode) Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio 4 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it. SCAN Button (Radio Mode) Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time. Voice Recognition Button (UConnect™ Hands Free Phone) — If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UConnect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more information. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a “UConnect™ System Not Available” message will display on the radio screen. Phone Button (UConnect™ Hands Free Phone) — If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UConnect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more information. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a “UConnect™ System Not Available” message will display on the radio screen. TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays. Clock Setting Procedure 1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change. 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds. The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in this display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2. INFO Button (Radio Mode) Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). RW/FF (Radio Mode) Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies. TUNE Control (Radio Mode) Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency. Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones. Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. 4 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones. allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information. Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers. Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format types: Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade. MUSIC TYPE Button (Radio Mode) Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will Program Type No program type or undefined Adult Hits Classical Classic Rock College Country Foreign Language Information Jazz 16 Digit-Character Display None Adlt Hit Classicl Cls Rock College Country Language Inform Jazz UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Program Type News Nostalgia Oldies Personality Public Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock Soft Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports Talk Top 40 16 Digit-Character Display News Nostalga Oldies Persnlty Public R&B Rel Musc Rel Talk Rock Soft Soft Rck Soft R&B Sports Talk Top 40 Program Type Weather 16 Digit-Character Display Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items: NOTE: Use the Tune Control Knob to scroll through the entries. Push the Audio/Select button to select an entry and make changes. 4 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode, selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu (If Equipped). • DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button (If Equipped). • DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following: • Subtitle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (If Equipped). • Audio Stream – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages (if supported on the disc) (If Equipped). • Angle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (If Equipped). NOTE: The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc. NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing a DVD. • VES Power - Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF (If Equipped). • VES Lock - Locks out rear VES remote controls (If Equipped). • VES CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change mode of either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones, by pressing the Audio/Select button (If Equipped). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 • Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock. Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes. • Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items, and set defaults according to customer preference. Menu Language — If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language (effective only if language supported by disc). If customer wishes to select a language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙ Enter the 4-digit country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the # and then push to select. Audio Language — If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default audio language (effective only if language supported by disc). If customer wishes to select a language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the # and then push to select. Subtitle Language — If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default subtitle language (effective only if language supported by disc). If customer wishes to select a language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the # and then push to select. Subtitles — If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between subtitle OFF or ON. 4 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Audio DRC — If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum audio dynamic range - The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is ⬙Normal.⬙ Aspect Ratio — If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between wide screen, pan scan, and letter box. AutoPlay — If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted, it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not auto play the main title. In such cases, use the menu button on the remote control to select desired title to play. NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer-preferred settings. AM and FM Buttons (Radio Mode) Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes. SET Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the Push-Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push-button memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push-button memory. You may add a second station to each push-button by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode) These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations}. DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes. Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of 5 times. CAUTION! The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate “Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components. 4 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s) Press the LOAD button and the push-button with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player. Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is reading the disc. CAUTION! • This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s) Press the eject button and the push-button with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc. Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio. The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. SEEK Button (CD MODE) Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD, MP3/MWA modes. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 SCAN Button (CD MODE) Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing. TIME Button (CD MODE) Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display. RW/FF (CD MODE) Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner. AM or FM Button (CD MODE) Switches the Radio to the Radio mode. Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the following restrictions. Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3. Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. 4 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The radio uses the following limits for file systems: • Maximum number of directory levels: 8 • Maximum number of files: 255 • Maximum number of folders: 100 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a 3-character extension) • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a 3-character extension) Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/ WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/ WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times. If a disc contains multi formats, such as CD audio and mp3/wma tracks, the radio will only play the mp3/wma tracks on that disc. Supported MP3/WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file. When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 MPEG Specification MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 Sampling Frequency (kHz) 48, 44.1, 32 Bit rate (kbps) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48 MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16 WMA Specification Sampling Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps) 44.1 and 48 48, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192 VBR WMA ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. Playback of MP3/WMA Files When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3/WMA files. Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be affected by the following: • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs • Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc. 4 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files). The folder list will time out after 5 seconds. INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available). Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode. NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file. SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (UConnect™) (If Equipped) Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 of this manual. Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If Equipped) Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section. TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for 5 seconds. RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode) No function. SET Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES威) (If Equipped) Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES威) Guide.” Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 4 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS ⬙DTS⬙ and ⬙DTS 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. SALES CODE RER — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit’s faceplate. The RER multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius Satellite Radio player, Navigation system, CD/DVD player, USB port, 20 gigabyte Hard Drive (HDD), and the UConnect威 hands-free Bluetooth cellular system. NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect威, the unit will respond with a “Feature Not Available” message when selecting controls related to this feature. A 6.5-inch touch screen allows easy menu selection, while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertainment, and hands-free mobile phone use. The satellite navigation capability combines a GlobalPositioning System-based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes. A shared Hard Drive (HDD) for the navigation system, the database, and other radio features allows uploads of UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 music and photos from CDs or through the USB port. While the Gracenote database finds the artist, track, and title for the music. camera, and on some models a dual display screen operation. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instructions. An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System (VES), separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system’s wireless headphones. This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear-seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio. Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instructions. Other special features include direct tune, music type selections, Traffic Messaging (optional), easy store presets, parental lockout for VES (if equipped), backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped) Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instructions. Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set. 4 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Changing the Time Zone 1. Turn on the system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top of the screen, proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3. 3. If the words “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the words “User Clock” are displayed. The GPS time setting menu will appear on the screen. 4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen. 5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu. Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected, this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the current setting: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are displayed to change the current setting. Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock, you can manually adjust the time by performing the following: 1. Turn on the system. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the top of the screen, proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3. 3. If the words “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the words “GPS Time” are displayed. The user clock time setting menu will appear on the screen. 4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed. 5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed. 6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. Show Time if Radio is Off When selected, this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current setting: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.” Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is Off” are displayed to change the current setting. 4 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate. Operating Instructions - Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Press the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. RES Radio (Non-Satellite Model Shown - With Satellite Similar) SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it. SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time. Voice Recognition Button (UConnect™ Hands Free Phone) — If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UConnect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more information. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With UConnect” message will display on the radio screen. Phone Button (UConnect™ Hands Free Phone) — If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone (UConnect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more information. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With UConnect” message will display on the radio screen. TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays. 4 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Clock Setting Procedure 1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob. 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change. 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds. The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button, use the TUNE control to select SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies. TUNE Control Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones. Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade. Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones. Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers. MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information. Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format types: 4 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Program Type No program type or undefined Adult Hits Classical Classic Rock College Country Foreign Language Information Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies Personality Public 16 Digit-Character Display None Adlt Hit Classicl Cls Rock College Country Language Inform Jazz News Nostalga Oldies Persnlty Public Program Type Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock Soft Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports Talk Top 40 Weather 16 Digit-Character Display R&B Rel Musc Rel Talk Rock Soft Soft Rck Soft R&B Sports Talk Top 40 Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items: • Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock. Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes. AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes. SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push-button memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push-button memory. You may add a second station to each push-button by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push-button twice. 4 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to push-button memory {12 AM and 12 FM stations}. DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes. Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. NOTE: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch, a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded. If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the disc number, the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 CAUTION! • This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism. • RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded. • Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause damage to the player. EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD, MP3 modes. SCAN Button Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing. 4 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display. RW/FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track/title. Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play. Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions. AM or FM Button Switches the Radio to the Radio mode. Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. RND Button (Random Play Button) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. The radio uses the following limits for file systems: • Maximum number of folder levels: 8 • Maximum number of files: 255 • Maximum number of folders (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display. • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a 3-character extension) • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a 3-character extension) Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times. Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file. When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit 4 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates. MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency (kHz) MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32 MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16 Bit Rate (kbps) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8 ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files. Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following: • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs • Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files). The folder list will time out after 5 seconds. INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available). Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode. Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file. Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. 4 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for 5 seconds (when ignition is off). Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (UConnect™) (If Equipped) Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 of this manual. Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If Equipped) Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section. Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES威) (If Equipped) Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES威) Guide.” SATELLITE RADIO (RSC) — IF EQUIPPED (REQ AND RES RADIOS ONLY) Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factoryinstalled satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information, including the set up of your on-line listening account at no additional charge. For UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 further information, call the toll-free number 888-5397474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when calling: selected. Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in 2 minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen. 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID). Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode. 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number. Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ENS/SID) The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps: ESN/SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACCESSORY position and the radio ON, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped). Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna. 4 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons: • The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle. • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes. • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception. • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage. Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it. SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for 8 seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time. INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available) information. Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display). By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name. RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel. TUNE Control (Rotary) Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter-clockwise to decrease the channel. MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type. SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items: • Display Sirius ID number — Press the SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription. SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to push-button memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. 4 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into push-button memory. You may add a second channel to each push-button by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push-button memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to push-button memory {12 Satellite stations}. Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If Equipped) Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 of this manual. Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES姞) (If Equipped) Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES威) Guide.” VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) includes the following components for rear seat entertainment: • A diagonal seven-inch liquid crystal display (LCD) screen integrated into the center console armrest. The screen features brightness control for optimum daytime and nighttime viewing. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 4 Opening the Rear Seat Video Entertainment System VES™ Video Screen • The LCD Screen swings up from the rear of the armrest to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display. NOTE: Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been raised to its viewing position. • The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers. 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • A battery-powered infrared remote control that snaps into a molded compartment in the center console armrest upper storage bin. Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks) on the rear of the center console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera, connect video games for display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3 player. 1. Video in (yellow) 2. Left audio in (white) 3. Right audio in (red) NOTE: Refer to your “Vehicle Entertainment System (VES™) User Manual” for detailed operating instructions. VES Remote Control • Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passengers to listen to the same or individual audio sources. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF EQUIPPED • the iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector. NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ radios only with UConnect.™ For sales code REN touch screen radio, refer to the separate User’s Manual. Connecting the iPod姞 Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI connector (which is located in the glove box on some vehicles. This location may vary with vehicle). Once the iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle system (this may take a few seconds to connect), the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod威 display, and it starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below. This feature allows you to plug in an iPod威 into the vehicle’s sound system through a connector (UCI connector) using an optional connection cable (available through Mopar威). See your authorized dealer for details. Using this feature, • the iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) information display on radio. • the iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse and List the iPod威 contents. Controlling the iPod姞 using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate. Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, the iPod威 audio track (if available from iPod威) will start playing over the vehicle audio system. 4 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod威 will be in Play mode. In this Play mode , you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display data: TUNE/SCROLL Knob Use the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to go to the next or previous track. The “TUNE/SCROLL” knob functions similar to the scroll wheel on the iPod威. Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click while playing a track skips to the next track. Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click during the first 2 seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list and turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track. RW (Rewind) Button Press and hold the “RW” button to move backward in the current track. Holding the “RW” button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track. Pressing and releasing the “RW” button will go back 5 seconds of the current track. FF (Fast Forward) Button Press and hold the “FF” button to move forward in the current track. Pressing and releasing the “FF” button will go forward 5 seconds of the current track. SEEK Buttons Use the “SEEK” buttons to move to the previous or the next track. If the left (down) button is pressed during the first 2 seconds of the current track, it will go back to the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 previous track in the list, if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track. If the right (up) button is pressed during Play mode, it will go to the next track in the list. INFO Button Press the “INFO” button while a track is playing to see the information (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) for that track. Each press the “INFO” button will take you to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have seen all of the screens, the last press of the “INFO” button will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio. REPEAT Button Press the “REPEAT” button to repeat the current playing track SCAN Button Pressing the “SCAN” button will play the first 5 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song. To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, press the “SCAN” button again. During the SCAN mode, you can also press the SEEK button to the left or right to go to the previous or next tracks. RND (Random) Button (RES Radios Only) Pressing the “RND” button will switch between the shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPod威. If the “RND” icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is on. 4 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL List or Browse Mode During Play mode, pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode. List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威. TUNE/SCROLL Knob In the List mode, the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威. Turning the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob clockwise (forward) and counter-clockwise (backward) scrolls through lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display, press the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select and start playing the track. By turning the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob fast, you can jump through the list faster. During fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display. During all List modes, the iPod威 will display all lists in “wrap-around” mode. So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list, you just turn the “TUNE/ SCROLL” knob backwards (counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster. Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode, the radio preset buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威. • 1 – Playlists • 2 – Artists • 3 – Albums • 4 – Genres • 5 - Audiobooks • 6 – Podcasts After pressing a preset button, you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 To exit the List mode without selecting a track, press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode. LIST Button Pressing the “LIST” button will take to the top level menu of the iPod威. This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod威. Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob. This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod威 and you can follow the same the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威 sub menu levels are available on this system. REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock positions. 4 MUSIC TYPE Button The “MUSIC TYPE” button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod威. Electronic Vehicle Information Center 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive display. This is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and tachometer. VOLUME Button The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system. Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level. Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to decrease the sound level. Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen displays radio and media mode information AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle. MODE Button If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the mode will change (i.e. from AM to FM, to Media mode, etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle). When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/ Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to operate various radio, media, and FUNC- Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions TION (i.e. advance presets, select next folder, jump to SELECT or start playing songs in playlists, etc., dependButton ing on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI). When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/ Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters, SCROLL files, etc., depending on which radio is in the Button vehicle. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the following precautions: 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. 3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners, or antistatic sprays. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high. RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation. CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. 4 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System Blower Control The rotary knob on the left controls the blower. The control has an OFF position and four speed settings. The blower will remain on until the control is turned to the OFF position or the ignition is turned OFF. Manual Temperature Controls Temperature Control The rotary knob in the center controls air temperature. Rotate the control to the left for cooler air temperature and to the right for warmer air temperature. Rotating the control to the extreme left provides the coldest setting. Rotating the control to the extreme right provides the warmest setting. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 Mode Control The rotary knob on the right controls airflow distribution. Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the operator to fine-tune airflow distribution. The mode settings are as follows: • Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles. NOTE: To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only when necessary. • Defrost/Floor Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles. • Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats. • Bi-Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and through the outlets located on the floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to partially block airflow. • Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow. 4 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Recirculation Control The mode control knob also controls the recirculation feature. You can choose BiLevel Recirculation air outlets, Panel Recirculation air outlets, or a mix or both while in this mode. Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However, when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re-used. Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle rapidly. The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust. Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on and turn off the air conditioning. When the air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control. Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning. An LED in the button will illuminate when compressor operation is selected. Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. To accomplish this, the system gathers information from UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 the controls on the climate control, from a dual sunsensor located in the top of the instrument panel, from an infrared sensor located in the face of the climate control, and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle. The controls on the climate control provide the system with operator input. The dual sun-sensor monitors sun load coming through the windshield. The infrared sensor independently measures the surface temperature of the driver and passenger. Other sensors take account of vehicle-speed, A/C pressure, outside temperature, and engine cooling temperature. Using all of these inputs, the system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, airflow distribution, airflow volume, and the amount of outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions. Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning the Mode Control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place the Blower Control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver or passenger Temperature Control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system will automatically make the adjustment. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake. 72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person; however, this may vary. NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation. 4 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Air conditioning in this system is automatic. Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary. The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode (ten minutes). This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off. NOTE: • The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the location of the climate control sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system. • Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left). NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details. 4 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob (on the right) to one of the following positions. • Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles. • Defrost/Floor Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles. • Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats. • Bi-Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and through the outlets located on the floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow. • Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow. • Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only. When the air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to 4 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL turn off the air conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected. NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position. • Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke, odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired. The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. An LED in the button illuminates when the recirculation mode is active. You may use this feature separately. NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. Operating Tips NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions. Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging. Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather. NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur. Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. A/C Air Filter — If Equipped The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual for filter replacement instructions. 4 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Electric Rear Window Defroster The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is located on the climate control. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON. The defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes of operation for the first push of the button, and will turn off after approximately 5 minutes for the second push of the button. CAUTION! To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 ▫ Normal Starting (Tip Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 ▫ Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 ▫ Automatic Transmission — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . 306 ▫ 4 Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 307 ▫ 5 Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 312 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 ▫ AutoStick威 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 303 䡵 All Wheel Drive — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 5 296 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System — If Equipped . . . . . 325 䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 䡵 Multi Displacement System (MDS) — 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 䡵 Traction Control System (TCS) — If Equipped . . 328 䡵 Brake Assist System (BAS) — If Equipped . . . . . 330 䡵 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 ▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 ▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator And ESP/TCS Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 338 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 340 䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 ▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 ▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 348 STARTING AND OPERATING 297 ▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 348 ▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 360 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 ▫ 2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 ▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 ▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 䡵 Self-Sealing Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 ▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 5 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 380 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 ▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 372 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . 373 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 389 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 STARTING AND OPERATING 299 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death. • Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever. Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle fire, which may cause serious or fatal injuries. 5 300 STARTING AND OPERATING Automatic Transmission The gear selector must be in the “N” (Neutral) or “P” (Park) position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear. CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Normal Starting (Tip Start) NOTE: Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal. Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure. Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C) To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your dealer) is recommended. 5 302 STARTING AND OPERATING If Engine Fails To Start WARNING! • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully. If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure. CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. STARTING AND OPERATING 303 After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module. WARNING! Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 5 304 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Automatic Transmission — General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon: • Altitude • Vehicle Loading • Driving Style • Selector lever position • Accelerator position • Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation, and the road characteristics. NOTE: • After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating, especially when the engine is cold. • If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first. STARTING AND OPERATING 305 • The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles. The selector lever is automatically locked while in the “P” (Park) position. To move the selector lever out of the “P” (Park) position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release. Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selector lever is in “D” (Drive) or “R” (Reverse) position. WARNING! Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always shift the vehicle into “P” (Park), remove the key from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition, the transmission selector lever is locked in the “P” (Park) position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle. 5 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature, the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in “D” (Drive) position. After the transmission cools down, it will return to normal operation. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift interlock system (BTSI) that holds the selector lever in the “P” (Park) position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. To move the selector lever out of the “P” (Park) position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position, and the brake pedal must be depressed. Brake Interlock Override For electrical system malfunctions, there is an override for the interlock system. In order to override this system the key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or ON position. Remove the rubber storage tray from the bin located to the right of the selector lever. The override can be activated by pressing the pink-colored STARTING AND OPERATING 307 tab, which can be accessed through a hole inside the bin. While the override is pressed, the shifter can be moved out of the “P” (Park) position without pressing the brake. After operation, return the rubber storage tray to its original position. 4 Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from “D” (Drive) to “P” (Park) or “R” (Reverse) (or from P or R to D) should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the selector lever between these gears. 5 Selector Lever Gear Ranges “P” (Park) “P” (Park) supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Never use “P” (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in the “P” (Park) position first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in “P” (Park), otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. WARNING! Never use “P” (Park) position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the selector lever into the “P” (Park) position: • When shifting into “P’ (Park) move the lever all the way forward until it stops, and is fully seated. • Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the “P” (Park) position. STARTING AND OPERATING 309 CAUTION! CAUTION! Damage to the shifter could result if the selector lever is moved out of “P” (Park) before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position. Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage. “R” (Reverse) For moving the vehicle rearward. Always stop before moving the lever to “R” (Reverse), except when rocking the vehicle. “N” (Neutral) Engine may be started in this range. WARNING! Do not coast in “N” (Neutral) and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. “D” (Overdrive) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest up shifts and down 5 310 STARTING AND OPERATING shifts, and the best fuel economy. Select the “3” range when frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers. “3” (Third) This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transmission will operate normally in First, Second and Third while in this range. The “3” position should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress. NOTE: • If the vehicle is started in cold temperatures, shifts into Overdrive may be delayed. Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate temperature. Refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” later in this section. NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. • If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or engage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive will resume normal operation. “L” (Low) This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections. STARTING AND OPERATING 311 CAUTION! Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes. These practices can cause overheating and damage to the transmission. Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed drops, or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages. NOTE: • The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usually after 1–3 miles [1.6–4.8 km] of driving). Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into “Overdrive” when cold. This is considered a normal condition. Pulling the selector lever into the “3” position will show that the transmission is able to shift into and out of “Overdrive.” • If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission. This is considered a normal condition and it will not cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within 5 seconds of shifting from “P” (Park) into any other gear position. 5 312 STARTING AND OPERATING Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected. “P” (Park), “R” (Reverse), and “N” (Neutral) will continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission. If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears. • Stop the vehicle and shift into “P” (Park). • Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine. • Shift into “D” (Drive) and resume driving. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is required. 5 Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from “D” (Drive) to “P” (Park) or “R” (Reverse) (or from “P” or “R” to “D”) should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the selector lever between these gears. STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Never use “P” (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in the “P” (Park) position first, and then apply the parking brake. Selector Lever Gear Ranges “P” (Park) “P” (Park) supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before placing the gear selector in “P” (Park), otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. 5 314 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! CAUTION! Never use “P” (Park) position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. Damage to the shifter could result if the selector lever is moved out of “P” (Park) before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the selector lever into the “P” (Park) position: • When shifting into “P” (Park) move the lever all the way forward until it stops, and is fully seated. • Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the “P” (Park) position. “R” (Reverse) Shift into “R” (Reverse) gear only when the vehicle is completely stopped. “N” (Neutral) No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage “N” (Neutral) position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads). The engine may be started in this range. Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed. STARTING AND OPERATING 315 CAUTION! Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage. WARNING! Do not coast in “N” (Neutral) and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. “D” (Drive) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear. The “D” (Drive) position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers, use the AutoStick威 mode and select the “3” range. AutoStick威 Gear selection The AutoStick威 feature can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the right or the left with the lever in the “D” (Drive) position. The gear currently selected is indicated in the instrument cluster display. Briefly, press 5 316 STARTING AND OPERATING the selector lever in the “D -” direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. Press and hold the selector lever in the “D-” direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear directly to the next lowest gear for best acceleration. NOTE: To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever is moved in “D -” direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolutions per minute (RPM) limit would be exceeded. Briefly, press the selector lever in the “D +” direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear. Press and hold the selector lever in the “D +” direction and the transmission will shift from the current gear directly to gear “D.” WARNING! On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident. Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation, you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission STARTING AND OPERATING 317 damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode. If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, “P” (Park), “R” (Reverse), and “N” (Neutral) will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the “D” (Drive) shifter position. The Malfunction Indicator Light may be illuminated. A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service. To reset the transmission, use the following procedure: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Move the selector lever to the “P” (Park) position. 3. Turn off the engine. 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Move the selector lever to the desired range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears. Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three times. Follow the reset procedure described under “Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode” in this section. 5 318 STARTING AND OPERATING In Permanent Limp Home Mode, “P” (Park), “R” (Reverse), and “N” (Neutral) will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the “D” (Drive) shifter position. The malfunction indicator light may illuminate. AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations. Autostick姞 Operation By placing the selector lever in the “D” (Drive) position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the selector lever to the Left (-) triggers a downshift and to the Right (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator. You can shift in or out of the Autostick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between the five available gears. When you wish to engage Autostick威, simply move the selector lever to the Right or Left (D+/D-) while in the “D” (Drive) position. The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen. STARTING AND OPERATING 319 ALL WHEEL DRIVE — IF EQUIPPED This feature provides full time All Wheel Drive (AWD) with Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)/Traction Control. The front wheels provide 38% of the torque, and the rear wheels provide 62% of the torque. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. CAUTION! All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and/or the transfer case. DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels. WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). 5 320 STARTING AND OPERATING Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. 2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles. 3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following before doing so: CAUTION! • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e. engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e. fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty. 5 322 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you stranded. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! Never use “P” (Park) position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in the “P” (Park) position first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in P (Park), STARTING AND OPERATING 323 otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal and then release. 5 Parking Brake The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is on. NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 324 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake failure, and an accident. BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light. In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Anti-Lock Brake System — If Equipped The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up. ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops. The electronic brake force distribution (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle. • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop), When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h). • brake pedal pulsations, You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti-lock: • the clicking sound of solenoid valves, • and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS. 5 326 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! • The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. • The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer. Anti-Lock Brake Light The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible. STARTING AND OPERATING 327 If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system. Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. 5 328 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur. MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) — 5.7L Engine Only This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect. TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! The Traction Control System (TCS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The TCS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. The Traction Control System (TCS) is standard on vehicles equipped with Electronic Stability Program (ESP). STARTING AND OPERATING 329 The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. The ESP/TCS indicator light, located in the instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The indicator light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the indicator light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. When the TCS is switched off, the torque reduction feature is cancelled. However, a feature of the system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential. If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This wheel slip control is active up to 50 mph (80 km/h). CAUTION! When the ESP/TCS indicator light is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off. Avoid spinning one drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drive train. NOTE: • The Traction Control System comes on each time the ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur even if you used the ESP OFF button to turn OFF the system. • The Traction Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when in operation. 5 330 STARTING AND OPERATING Refer to “Electronic Stability Program (ESP)” in this section for additional system information and operating instructions. BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS) — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! The BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. The Brake Assist System (BAS) is standard on vehicles equipped with Electronic Stability Program (ESP). The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions that might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s braking style. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking power during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. STARTING AND OPERATING 331 ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! The ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path. The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. 5 332 STARTING AND OPERATING The ESP/TCS indicator light, located in the instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The indicator light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the indicator light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The ESP OFF button is located in the center of the instrument panel. To turn OFF the ESP, momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the ESP/TCS indicator light will illuminate. To turn the system ON again, momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the indicator light will turn OFF. NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, switch off the ESP by pressing the ESP OFF button. STARTING AND OPERATING 333 CAUTION! When the ESP/TCS indicator light is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off. Avoid spinning one drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drive train. CAUTION! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the engine must be shut off (key in the ignition switch to the LOCK or ACC position). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and it will apply the rear wheel brakes. Synchronizing ESP The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator. If the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light may illuminate with the engine running. If this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right. The ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light should go out. However, if the light remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator and ESP/TCS Indicator Lights The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light and the 5 334 STARTING AND OPERATING yellow ESP/TCS indicator light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go out with the engine running. TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings The system will turn the ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles, and you have driven the vehicle several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. NOTE: • P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. STARTING AND OPERATING 335 • European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H • Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. • LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. • High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. 5 336 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards T = Temporary Spare tire 31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in) 215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%) —Ratio of section height to section width of tire. 10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in) R = Construction Code —⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction. —⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction. 15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in) STARTING AND OPERATING 337 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index —A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry. H = Speed Symbol —A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions. —The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits). Load Identification: ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire Light Load = Light Load Tire C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry. Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. 5 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. STARTING AND OPERATING 339 EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation —This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use. MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits) ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits) —03 means the 3rd week. 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits) —01 means the year 2001. —Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991. 5 340 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side “B” pillar. Tire and Loading Information Tire Placard Location This placard tells you important information about the: 1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) the total weight your vehicle can carry STARTING AND OPERATING 341 3) the tire size designed for your vehicle 4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. 5 342 STARTING AND OPERATING passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392 kg). STARTING AND OPERATING 343 5 344 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: 1. Safety— WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents. • Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure. • Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. STARTING AND OPERATING 345 2. Economy— Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption. maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure Information” section of this manual. 3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability— Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. 5 Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B” pillar. Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to 346 STARTING AND OPERATING check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated. CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12 °F (7 °C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68 °F (20 °C) and the outside temperature = 32 °F (0 °C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 °F (7 °C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). Radial-Ply Tires WARNING! Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine them with other types of tires. Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. 5 348 STARTING AND OPERATING Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity. WARNING! Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time. CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Limited Use Spare — If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the STARTING AND OPERATING 349 original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck. WARNING! Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this manual for additional information. The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 5 350 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point. Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to: • Driving style • Tire pressure • Distance driven STARTING AND OPERATING 351 WARNING! Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for the size designation of your tire. The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. 5 352 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! CAUTION! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have an accident. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in: • Fast tire wear. • Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided wear. • Vehicle pull to right or left. Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right. Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer for proper diagnosis. STARTING AND OPERATING 353 Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration. Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear. SELF-SEALING TIRES — IF EQUIPPED A non-hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0.19 in. (5 mm) to minimize the loss of air pressure. This contributes to the safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the probability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire. TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain manufacturer. In addition, only install tire chains on P215/65 R17 and P225/60 R18 size tires. The P245/45 R20 size tires do not provide adequate clearance for tire chains. NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire. CAUTION! To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: • Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use. • Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mile (0.8 km). • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. • Use on Rear Wheels only. • Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement. • Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture. 5 354 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains. SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S designation on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended tire rotation frequency. STARTING AND OPERATING 355 Remember, more frequent rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation. The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the following diagram. TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF EQUIPPED • The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. • The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires – General Information” in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire 5 356 STARTING AND OPERATING pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. • The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the lowpressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. • The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. − For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. STARTING AND OPERATING 357 CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. NOTE: • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light. 5 358 STARTING AND OPERATING • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. Base System — If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver Module • 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the lowpressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. The STARTING AND OPERATING 359 vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials, which may block radio wave signals. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. NOTE: Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. 3. Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. 5 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Vehicles with Compact Spare 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Premium System — If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver Module • 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors STARTING AND OPERATING 361 • 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel-wells) • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display one or more Low Pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for 3 seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing. • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the 5 Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in 362 STARTING AND OPERATING the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for 3 seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: STARTING AND OPERATING 363 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. NOTE: 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. Vehicles with Compact Spare 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPM Telltale 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials, which may block radio wave signals. NOTE: Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, 5 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for 3 seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for 3 seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses: United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123 Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123 STARTING AND OPERATING 365 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2.7L Engine The 2.7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance. 3.5L and 5.7L Engines The 3.5L & 5.7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, 5 366 STARTING AND OPERATING and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available. Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. CAUTION! DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components. Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the STARTING AND OPERATING 367 manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol. MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether his/her gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, and damage the emission control system. 5 368 STARTING AND OPERATING • An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your dealer for service assistance. • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 369 • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. • Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. 5 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. Fuel Filler Door 370 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement. CAUTION! • Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). • A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system. • A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. Gas Cap Tether Hook STARTING AND OPERATING 371 WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled. • Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. NOTE: • Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled. • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. 5 372 STARTING AND OPERATING A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in Section 7 of this manual for more information. VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated. • Month and year of manufacture • Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) • Type of Vehicle • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR. The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear of the driver’s door. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. The label contains the following information: • Name of manufacturer STARTING AND OPERATING 373 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. WARNING! Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Overloading The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR. The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR. Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles. Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. 5 374 STARTING AND OPERATING Loading To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been exceeded. STARTING AND OPERATING 375 EXAMPLE ONLY Empty Weight Load (Including driver, passengers, and cargo) Total GAWR Front Rear Axle Axle 2054 lbs 1805 lbs (932 kg) (819 kg ) 271 lbs 579 lbs (123 kg) (263 kg) 2325 lbs 2384 lbs (1055 kg) (1081 kg) 2546 lbs 2708 lbs (1155 kg) (1228 kg) NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” attached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWRs. This table is only an example. TRAILER TOWING In this section, you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. 5 376 STARTING AND OPERATING Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver). Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. WARNING! It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Tongue Weight (TW) Tongue weight (TW) is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Frontal Area Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer. Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. 5 378 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident. • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. Weight Distributing Hitch System STARTING AND OPERATING 379 The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Max. GTW towable for your given drivetrain. Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for package content. Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) Class II - Medium 3,500 lbs (1587 kg) Duty Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg) Class IV - Extra 10,000 lbs (4540 kg) Heavy Duty All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. 5 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. Engine/Transmission 2.7L & 3.5L Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Automatic Frontal Area 22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square meters) 22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square meters) 22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square meters) 22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square meters) Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Up to 2 persons & Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg) Up to 3 persons & Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg) Up to 4 persons & Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg) Up to 5 persons & NO Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg) Max. Tongue Wt. 100 lbs (45 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Engine/Transmission Frontal Area 32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square meters) 32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square meters) 32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square meters) 32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square meters) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. 3.5L All Wheel Drive (AWD) & 5.7L Automatic NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety Information” in this section. Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Up to 2 persons & Luggage 2,000 lbs (907 kg) Up to 3 persons & Luggage 2,000 lbs (907 kg) Up to 4 persons & Luggage 1,500 lbs (680 kg) Up to 5 persons & NO Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg) Max. Tongue Wt. 200 lbs (91 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg) Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side 5 382 STARTING AND OPERATING which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: • The tongue weight of the trailer. • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. • The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended: CAUTION! • Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle. • During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h). Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings. WARNING! Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident. • When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires. 5 384 STARTING AND OPERATING • Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels. • GCWR must not be exceeded. • Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: 1. GVWR 2. GTW 3. GAWR 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight). Towing Requirements — Tires − Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire. − Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires–General Information” in this section for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures. − Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. STARTING AND OPERATING 385 − Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Information” in this section for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure. − When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Information” in this section for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits. Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury. − An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. − Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). CAUTION! If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. 5 386 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. STARTING AND OPERATING 387 5 4 - Pin Connector 7 - Pin Connector 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic. Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range should be selected. NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking. If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic transamission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing” in the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual. Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If Equipped) − Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. − When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. − Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. Towing Tips — Autostick威 (If Equipped) − For vehicles equipped with Autostick.威 By using the Autostick威 modes, and selecting a specific gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance. For example, choose “4” if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to maintain the desired speed. STARTING AND OPERATING 389 − Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows. Towing Tips — Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions: − City Driving When stopped for short periods, put transmission in “N” (Neutral) and increase engine idle speed. − Highway Driving Reduce speed. − Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily. − Refer to “Cooling System” under “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual for more information. RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground) Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended. NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four wheels are off the ground. 5 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 ▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 ▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . 396 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 ▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 ▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 ▫ Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation (If Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 6 392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets. To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warning is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF. Hazard Flasher Switch NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. • On the highways — Slow down. • In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in “N” (Neutral), but do not increase engine idle speed. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and the fan control to HI. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. 6 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING! • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 Preparations For Jacking 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas. 2. Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK. 3. Turn OFF the ignition. 4. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher. 6 Hazard Flasher Switch 5. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire. NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack. 1. Open the trunk. 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap. Opening The Access Panel 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 6 Spare Tire Fastener 4. Remove the spare tire. 5. Remove the fastener securing the jack. Jack Fastener 398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. 3. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle. Jacking and Changing a Tire 1. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. 2. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench. Center Cap Removal WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399 WARNING! To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges and retention teeth. 4. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counter-clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. 6 5. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange. 400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jack Engagement Locations WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401 6. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire. WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 7. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off. 8. Mount the spare tire. NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. However, when reinstalling the road tire, follow the procedure under “Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation” in place of the remaining steps in this procedure. 9. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground. 10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counter-clockwise. 11. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N. m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station. 12. Stow the jack, tools, and flat tire. Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener. 6 402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity. • Keep tire inflated to 60 PSI (414 KPa) Cold Inflation Pressure. • This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do not exceed 50 MPH (80 km/h) speed. Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation (If Required) NOTE: Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. For vehicles equipped with wheel covers, perform Steps 2 and 3. For vehicles equipped with center caps, proceed to Step 4. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground. 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover. 4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground. 2. Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs, which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counter-clockwise. 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The 6 404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N. m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station. 7. For vehicles equipped with center caps, install the center cap by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the center cap. 8. Stow the jack, tools, and spare tire. Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan. • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully. • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water. • A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes. • Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405 NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. 3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in “P” (Park), and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position on both vehicles. 1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. 4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads. 2. When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch one another. WARNING! Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. 5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine compartment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the following illustration for jump-starting connections. 6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to the following illustration for jump-starting connections. 6 406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! • You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing. • Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode. Jump-Starting • During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting because the battery could rupture or explode. The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump-start. 7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes. Then, start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407 NOTE: For vehicles equipped with ESP, refer to ⬙Synchronizing ESP⬙ under ⬙Electronic Stability Program⬙ in Section 5 of this manual if the ESP/BAS light (in the instrument cluster) remains on continuously after starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan. WARNING! Any procedure other than above could result in: 1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent; 2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion; 3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective. NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) — if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if equipped before rocking the vehicle. For details, refer to “Electronic Stability Program” or “Traction Control System” in this manual. 6 408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between “First” and R (Reverse), do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. • Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h). TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409 TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground) Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, is only permitted within the following limitations: With The Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in “N” (Neutral), the distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles (48 km), and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles (48 km), the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed truck. CAUTION! • Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the front fascia will result. • If the transmission is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles (48 km), then the only approved method of towing is with a flat bed truck. Damage to the transmission may result. • Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to the rear sheet metal, and fascia will occur. • Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result. 6 410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the key must be in the ON position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission remains in “N” (Neutral). TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 2.7L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 䡵 3.5L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 䡵 5.7L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 417 ▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 425 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 ▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 ▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 ▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 7 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 ▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 ▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 ▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . 445 ▫ Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . 432 ▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 446 ▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 ▫ Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 ▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders . . . 450 䡵 Fuses (Power Distribution Centers) . . . . . . . . . . 451 ▫ Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center) . . . . . 451 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 ▫ Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . 453 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 ▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 440 䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 ▫ Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 ▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, Park/Turn Light, Inner Park Light, And Outer Park Light – 300 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 ▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, And Park/Turn Light – 300C . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 ▫ Backup Light, Side Marker Light, And Tail/ Stop Turn Light — 300 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 ▫ License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 475 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 ▫ Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, And Backup Light — 300C Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 7 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center) Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover Coolant Bottle Power Steering Fluid 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post 10 — Washer Fluid Bottle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 3.5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT 7 1 2 3 4 5 — Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center) — Air Cleaner Filter — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover — Coolant Pressure Cap — Power Steering Fluid 6 — Coolant Bottle 7 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Washer Fluid Bottle 10 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center) Coolant Pressure Cap Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover Coolant Bottle Power Steering Fluid 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post 10 — Washer Fluid Bottle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. 7 Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a “Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready for testing. Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery replacement. If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do the following: 1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch. 2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine. 3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen: a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation, you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. 7 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals, there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance. However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level — 2.7L, 3.5L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0L) of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines. Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. 7 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0L) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range on these engines. Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for information on this system. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months, whichever occurs first. Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacture only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacture only recommends API Certified engine oils. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.7L and 5.7L Engines SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. 7 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS). Refer to “Multi Displacement System” under “Starting and Operating” for more details. Lubricants, which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. Lubricants, which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5L Engine SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3.5L Engines for all operating temperatures. Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended. Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner. Therefore, no belt tension adjustments are required. However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected periodically and replaced if required. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure. Inspect belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage, which could result in belt failure. Also, check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components. See your authorized dealer for service. 7 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the proper type of spark plug for use in your vehicle. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance intervals. NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road conditions” maintenance interval if applicable. WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting. Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your authorized dealer for service. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. CAUTION! Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. 7 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur, safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the engine off, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter, obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications immediately. To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. • Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions. Maintenance-Free Battery The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to touch each other. Battery Location • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). 7 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants. A/C Air Filter — If Equipped The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter. 7 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter indicate this). Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals. Power Steering — Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership. WARNING! Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power steering fluid. If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints The suspension ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed. Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including seat tracks, door hinges, trunk hinges, and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism, and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder. Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. 7 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers — If Equipped The windshield washer and the headlight washer (if equipped) share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Exhaust Gas” in the “Safety Tips” section of this manual. Cooling System WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. 7 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Coolant Checks Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual. If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution. Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the correct coolant type. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 CAUTION! • Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants, may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible. • Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-base engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended. Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles (160 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant. When adding coolant: • The manufacturer recommends using Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology). • Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are anticipated. 7 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. WARNING! • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. Points To Remember NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. 7 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. • Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing. • If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. • Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine, which contains aluminum components. • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean, also. • Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots, brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber. Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component, which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present. Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure. Fuel System The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel system’s hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline. You are urged to use only the manufacture specified hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service. Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings to insure they are properly installed and fully connected. See your authorized dealer for service. Brake System In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Suggested service intervals can be found in the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual. WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full braking capacity in an emergency. 7 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Brake and Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance, inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present. NOTE: • Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage. • Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure. WARNING! Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure. You could have an accident. If you see any signs of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake hoses replaced immediately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure. Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system. Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the correct fluid type. WARNING! • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. • Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification, may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking. You could have an accident. Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture. 7 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! Do not allow petroleum-base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Seal damage may result. • Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the correct fluid type. Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted. If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level. • The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended transmission fluid and filter change intervals. If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed. Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a Transfer Case and Front Differential. The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible. The transfer case fluid inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case fluid level, remove the inspection plug. The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. The transfer case fill plug is located on the rear housing near the output shaft. The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole. 7 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Fluid Changes Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended transfer case fluid change intervals. Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed. No regular maintenance is required for these components. Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. What Causes Corrosion? Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. The most common causes are: • Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation. • Stone and gravel impact. • Insects, tree sap, and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 Washing • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar威 Car Wash or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar威 Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. • Use Mopar威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. CAUTION! Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch metal and painted surfaces. Special Care • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. 7 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • Use Mopar威 touch up paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar威 Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only Mopar威 or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish. Interior Care Use Mopar威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and Mopar威 Carpet Cleaner for carpeting. Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, or Mopar威 Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar威 Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear 7 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. 2. Dry with a soft tissue. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar威 Total Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. Cleaning the Center Console Cup Holders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cup holder in the center console. NOTE: The cup holder cannot be removed. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 FUSES (POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS) Cavity Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center) A power distribution center is located in the engine compartment. This center contains fuses and relays. 1 Cartridge Fuse — 2 — 3 — 4 — 5 6 — — 7 — 8 — 9 — Front Power Distribution Center Mini Fuse Description 15 Amp Blue 25 Amp Neutral 25 Amp Neutral 25 Amp Neutral — 25 Amp Neutral 25 Amp Neutral 25 Amp Neutral — Washer Motor Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Ignition Run/Start Alternator/EGR Solenoid — Ignition Coils/Injectors/ Short Runner Valve Headlight Washer - if equipped Starter — 7 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink Mini Fuse Description Cavity — Windshield Wiper — Anti-lock Brakes System (ABS) Valves - if equipped Radiator Fan 18 19 20 21 22 40 Amp — Green 50 Amp — Red 60 Amp Yellow 50 Amp Red — — — Anti-lock Brakes System (ABS) Pump Motor - if equipped Radiator Fan — Radiator Fan — — — — Cartridge Fuse — — — — — Mini Fuse Description — — — — — — — — — — MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 CAUTION! • When installing the Power Distribution Center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and possibly result in an electrical system failure. Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center) There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. 7 Opening The Access Panel 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 6 Cartridge Fuse 40 Amp Green — 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink — 7 — 8 — 2 3 4 5 Rear Power Distribution Center Cavity 1 CarMini tridge Fuse Fuse 60 Amp — Yellow Description Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Mini Fuse — Description Integrated Power Module (IPM) — — — Integrated Power Module (IPM) — Heated Seats - if equipped 20 Amp Fuel Pump Yellow 15 Amp Rear Heated Seats - if Blue equipped 15 Amp Diagnostic Link ConnecBlue tor (DLC)/Wireless Control Module (WCM)/ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 Cavity 9 Cartridge Fuse — 10 11 * 12 * 13 * 14 — — — — — 15 — 16 17 — — Mini Fuse Description Cavity 20 Amp Yellow — — — — 10 Amp Red Power Outlet 18 Cartridge Fuse — — — — — AC Heater Control/ Cluster/Security Module - if equipped 20 Amp Trailer Tow Brake ModYellow ule - if equipped — — 20 Amp Cluster Yellow 19 — 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 — — — — — — — — 28 — Mini Fuse Description 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red — — — — — — — 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red Selectable Power Outlet Stop Lights — — — — — — — Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Ignition Run 7 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 29 Cartridge Fuse — 30 — 31 32 33 34 — — — — Mini Fuse 5 Amp Orange Description Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - if equipped/ Cluster/Electronic Stability Program (ESP) - if equipped/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/ Stop Light Switch 10 Amp Door Modules/Power Red Mirrors/Steering Control Module (SCM) — — — — — — — — Cavity 35 Cartridge Fuse — 36 — 37 — 38 — Mini Fuse 5 Amp Orange Description Antenna Module - if equipped/Power Mirrors/Rain Sensor - if equipped 20 Amp Hands Free Phone - if Yellow equipped/Video Monitor - if equipped/Radio 15 Amp Transmission Blue 10 Amp Analog Clock/Cargo Red Light/Satellite Receiver (SDARS) Video - if equipped/Vehicle Information Module - if equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 Cavity 39 40 41 42 43 Cartridge Fuse — Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Orange Description Heated Mirrors - if equipped — Auto Inside Rearview Mirror - if equipped/ Heated Seats - if equipped/Switch Bank — 10 Amp AC Heater Control/ Red Headlights/Park Assist if equipped/Tire Pressure Monitoring - if equipped 30 Amp — Front Blower Motor Pink 30 Amp — Rear Window Defroster Pink Cavity 44 CarMini tridge Fuse Fuse 20 Amp — Blue Description Amplifier - if equipped/ Sunroof - if equipped * Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses (circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The Cluster, the Driver Seat Switch (if equipped), and the Memory Module (if equipped) are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 11. The Passenger Seat Switch (if equipped) is fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12. The Door Modules, the Driver Power Window Switch, and the Passenger Power Window Switch are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for service. 7 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • When installing the Power Distribution Center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and possibly result in an electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may: • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 Overhead Console Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220 Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket / Cup Holder Lighting . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Dealer) NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions. All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement. LIGHT BULBS — Exterior (300, 300 Touring Models) Bulb Number Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006 High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005 Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 Front Inner Park Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA Front Outer Park Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA Front Fog Light—If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer) Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Dealer) Tail/Stop/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Dealer) License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 7 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE LIGHT BULBS — Exterior (300C Models) Bulb Number Low Beam Headlight (Standard Halogen). . . . . 9006XS Low Beam Headlight – High Intensity Discharge (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S (Serviced at Dealer) High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005 Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK Front Fog Light. . . . . . . . 9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer) Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Dealer) Tail/Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 Tail Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 Turn Signal Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Dealer) Outside Mirror Turn Signal & Approach Lights. . . LED (Serviced at Dealer) License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, Park/Turn Light, Inner Park Light, and Outer Park Light – 300 Models 1. Open the hood. NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assembly on the driver side of the vehicle. 2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter-clockwise, and then pull it out of the headlight assembly. 3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlight assembly, and then turn it clockwise. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 1 — High Beam Headlight Bulb 2 — Low Beam Headlight Bulb 3 — Park/Turn Light Bulb 7 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and Park/Turn Light – 300C 4 — Inner Park Light Bulb 5 — Outer Park Light Bulb High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If Equipped The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 WARNING! A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. 1. Open the hood. NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assembly on the driver side of the vehicle. 2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter-clockwise, and then pull it out of the headlight assembly. 3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlight assembly, and then turn it clockwise. 7 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 1 — Low Beam Headlight Bulb 2 — High Beam Headlight Bulb 3 — Park/Turn Light Bulb CAUTION! Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 Backup Light, Side Marker Light, and Tail/Stop Turn Light — 300 Models 4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the tail light assembly. 1. Open the Trunk. 5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side. 2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light assembly. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector. 7 3. Pull back the trunk liner. 7. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs. 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter-clockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly. 2 — Side Marker Light Bulb 1 — Backup Light Bulb MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly, and then turn it clockwise. 11. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical connector, and trunk liner. 12. Close the trunk. 3 — Tail/Stop/Turn Light Bulb 9. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 7 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, and Backup Light — 300C Models 4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the tail light assembly. 1. Open the Trunk. 5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side. 2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light assembly. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Pull back the trunk liner. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 7. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counter-clockwise to remove. 8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter-clockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly. 1 — Tail/Stop Light Bulb 7 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 — Tail Light Bulb 3 — Turn Signal Light Bulb MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly, and then turn it clockwise. 11. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical connector, and trunk liner. 12. Close the trunk. 4 — Backup Light Bulb 9. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 7 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE License Light 1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia. 2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly. 3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 1 — License Light Bulb 2 — Socket 4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly. 5. Reattach the light to the rear fascia, and then install the screws. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES Fuel (approximate) 2.7 Liter Engine 3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive 3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive 5.7 Liter Engine Engine Oil-With Filter 2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) Cooling System * 2.7 Liter Engine (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent. 3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive (Mopar威 Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent. 18 18 19 19 U.S. Metric gallons gallons gallons gallons 68 68 72 72 liters liters liters liters 6.0 qts. 6.0 qts. 7.0 qts. 5.7 liters 5.7 liters 6.6 liters 9.9 qts 9.4 liters 11.1 qts 10.5 liters 7 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Fuel (approximate) 3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive (Mopar威 Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent. 5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent. 5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent. * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. U.S. Metric 11.4 qts 10.8 liters 14.7 qts 13.9 liters 15.1 qts 14.3 liters MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil (2.7 Liter) Engine Oil (3.5 Liter) Engine Oil (5.7 Liter) Spark Plugs (2.7L) Spark Plugs (3.5L) Spark Plugs (5.7L) Oil Filter (2.7 Liter) Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade. Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade. Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade. RE14PMC5 (Gap.050 in [1.27 mm]) ZFR5LP-13G (Gap.050 in [1.27 mm]) REC14MCC4 (Gap.043 in [1.1 mm]) Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent. 7 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Component Oil Filter (3.5 Liter) Oil Filter (5.7 Liter) Fuel Selection (2.7 Liter) Fuel Selection (3.5 Liter) Fuel Selection (5.7 Liter) Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent. Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent. 87 Octane 87 to 89 Octane 87 to 89 Octane Chassis Component Automatic Transmission Brake Master Cylinder Front Axle Power Steering Reservoir Rear Axle Transfer Case Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Mopar威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent. Mopar威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent. Mopar威 Transfer Case Lubricant LX, P/N 05170055AA, or equivalent. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 478 䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 ▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . 480 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A I N T E N A N C E 478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system. These, and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip H driving. E D U L E S 8 Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected. NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part, which has been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary. On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary. Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate, this means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). NOTE: • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479 M if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated. • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first. Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Required” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual or under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” under “Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in Section 3 of this manual. At Each Stop for Fuel • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark. A I N T E N A N C E • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if S C required. H E D • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or U L damage. E • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals S Once a Month as required. • Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering, and transmission, and add as needed. 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation. At Each Oil Change • Change the engine oil filter. • Inspect the brake hoses and lines. CAUTION! Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle. Required Maintenance Intervals MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481 M Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) Maintenance Items Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate the tires. If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary. Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary. Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped). Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months. Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary. Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Miles 6,000 6,000 Kilometers 10 000 10 000 or Months 6 6 12,000 20 000 12 12,000 12,000 18,000 20 000 20 000 30 000 12 12 18 24,000 40 000 24 24,000 40 000 24 24,000 40 000 24 30,000 50 000 30 A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A I N T E N Maintenance Items A N Inspect the transfer case fluid — All Wheel Drive C (AWD). E Replace the spark plugs on 5.7L engines. S C H E D U L E S 8 Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive (AWD). Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary. Flush and replace the engine coolant. Replace the spark plugs on 2.7L and 3.5L engines. Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) Miles Kilometers or Months 30,000 50 000 30 30,000 50 000 30 48,000 80 000 48 60,000 100 000 60 60,000 100 000 60 90,000 102,000 102,000 150 000 170 000 170 000 90 60 102 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 483 M Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) Maintenance Items Replace the timing belt on 3.5L engines. Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter. Replace the accessory drive belt on 2.7L engines. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Miles 102,000 120,000 120,000 Kilometers 170 000 200 000 200 000 or Months 102 120 120 A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 489 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 9 486 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty, discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem. Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident, or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know. Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items, and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 487 technicians, special tools, and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership. They want to know if you need assistance. • If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center. Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer Center should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) • Dealership name • Vehicle identification number • Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: (800) 992-1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 465–2001 In Mexico contact: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F. In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240 Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240 9 488 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about your service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to your contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 489 WARNING! Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to this vehicle. MOPAR姞 PARTS Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from your dealer. They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, and the manufacturer. 9 490 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov. In Canada: If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9. PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals. (No P.O. Boxes). • Service Manuals. These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 491 • Diagnostic Procedure Manuals. Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations, these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. • Owner’s Manuals. These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Call Toll Free at: • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at: • www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com • www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals 9 492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car. All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction Grades The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 493 Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 9 INDEX 10 496 INDEX About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,324 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . 152 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 437 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,143,434 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 426 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,284 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,431 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430,431 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,284,430 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,345 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,62 Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,64,79,205 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,60 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,60 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,209 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,445 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 436,437,473 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,326 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18 INDEX 497 Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,32 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 203,218 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 284 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 307,312,444,445 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445,476 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315,318 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,313 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,312 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,316,317 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315,318 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405,428 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,79 10 498 INDEX Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,441 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443,476 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,324 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,441 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 76 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459,460 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,459 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,424 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,368 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,252,253 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 INDEX 499 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68,69,72,74 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,72 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,235,238,253,258 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 275 Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 438 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436,439 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 10 500 INDEX Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 436,473,475 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 148,152 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,450 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,283,289 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Dipsticks Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,422 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . 272 Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 INDEX 501 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Electronic Brake Control System Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . 451 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . 148,152 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 209 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 213 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Emergency, In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 418,478 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,414,415,416 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,422 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414,415,416 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436,475 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,368 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Multi-Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,473,475 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,218,423 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,424 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 10 502 INDEX Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,473 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,424 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 63 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,368,435 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,434 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,431 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,475 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,135,202 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 INDEX 503 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,422 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 475 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,202 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365,475 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,417 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 10 504 INDEX Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,313 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,26,117,172,364 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373,376 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,375 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . 91,252,253 Hard Drive (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,434 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 136 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,139 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,434 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 INDEX 505 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 136 Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 177 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440,441 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,201,202 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Key Removal . . . Illuminated Entry . . . . . . Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . Indicator, Traction Control Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . Jack Location . . . . . Jack Operation . . . . Jacking Instructions Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 398 398 404 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 10 506 INDEX Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) Key-In Reminder . . . . . . Keyless Entry System . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 15 20 12 52 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,72 Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,459 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,130 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,64,79,205 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,326 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,324 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459,460 Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,176 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,136 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,333 Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 209 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,202 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,462 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 INDEX 507 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,139 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,208 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,202 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,176 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 212 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,176 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . 137 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,176 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459,460 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 212 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 210,355 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,134,135,202 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 202 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,374 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 10 508 INDEX Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 71,72 . 433 . 119 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 212,418 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,176 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Mode Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,489 MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 INDEX 509 Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 365,475 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,208 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,208 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,218 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,218 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,475 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,218,423 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,422 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,422 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,475 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,473 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,424,473 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,418 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207,393 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 490 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 10 510 INDEX Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,252,253 Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . 91,252,253 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 340 Port Universal Serial Bus (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 Power Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 187 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432,476 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 438 Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,253,281 INDEX 511 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252,253,268 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Rear Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Reception, Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Remote Control Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 279 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 203,218 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 10 512 INDEX Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252,253,268 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,43,79 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 47 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,68,69,74 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,44 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,209 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 436,475 INDEX 513 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,235,238,253,258 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,307,312 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,60 Side Curtain (Window Airbag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,135,202 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348,396 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,475 Specifications Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 148,152 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,299 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 10 514 INDEX Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327,432 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,145 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,145 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,458 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,458 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 52 Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,145 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 284 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 207,393 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,145 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 340 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 INDEX 515 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,344,492 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394,398 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395,398 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,341 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,344 Self-Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 389 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 10 516 INDEX Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445,476 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,307,312,444 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,313 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 177 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,208 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,41 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,202 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . 91,252 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 275 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 INDEX 517 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,252 Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,372,374 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,458 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18 Video Entertainment System (Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,424 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,143,434 Washers, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,139,434 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,186 Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,60 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 10 518 INDEX Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,283,289 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,139 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)Fob with Integrated KeyTip Start FeatureIgnition Key RemovalKey-In-Ignition ReminderSENTRY KEY Replacement KeysCustomer Key (Fob) ProgrammingGeneral InformationSECURITY ALARM SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Rearming of the SystemTo Arm the SystemTo Disarm the SystemILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY To unlock the doorsTo lock the doorsTo unlatch the trunkUsing The Panic AlarmProgramming Additional TransmittersTransmitter Battery ServiceGeneral Information REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED How To Use Remote StartDOOR LOCKS Manual Door LocksPower Door LocksChild Protection Door LockWINDOWS Power WindowsWind BuffetingTRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE TRUNK SAFETY WARNING Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder BeltsLap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ProcedureSeat Belt PretensionersEnhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert) Automatic Locking Mode - If EquippedSeat Belts and Pregnant WomenSeat Belt Extender Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - AirbagEvent Data Recorder (EDR)Child RestraintENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS SAFETY TIPS Transporting PassengersLock Your VehicleExhaust GasSafety Checks You Should Make Inside The VehiclePeriodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night MirrorAutomatic Dimming Inside Mirror - If EquippedOutside MirrorsExterior Mirrors Folding Feature - If Equipped Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer - If EquippedOutside Mirrors with Turn Signal and Approach Lighting - If EquippedTilt in Reverse Feature - If EquippedPower Remote Control MirrorsHeated Remote Control Mirrors - If EquippedIlluminated Vanity Mirrors - If EquippedHANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) - IF EQUIPPED OperationPhone Call FeaturesUConnect System FeaturesAdvanced Phone ConnectivityThings You Should Know About Your UConnect SystemGeneral InformationSEATS Power SeatsPower Reclining SeatsLumbar Support Head RestraintsHeated Seats - If EquippedFolding Rear Seat DRIVER MEMORY SEAT - IF EQUIPPED Programming The Memory FeatureLinking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Transmitter to the Memory FeatureMemory Position RecallEasy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat Only)TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD LIGHTS Headlight SwitchAutomatic Headlights - If EquippedHeadlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only)SmartBeams - If EquippedHeadlight Time DelayDaytime Running Lights - If Equipped Lights-on ReminderFog Lights - If EquippedMulti-Function LeverOverhead Console Map/Reading LightsInterior LightsWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper SystemMist FeatureWindshield WashersHeadlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only)Rain Sensing Wipers - If EquippedAdding Washer FluidHEADLIGHT WASHERS - IF EQUIPPED Adding Washer FluidTILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN - IF EQUIPPED ADJUSTABLE PEDALS - IF EQUIPPED ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL Electronic Speed Control OperationTo ActivateTo Set At A Desired SpeedTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedTo Vary the Speed SettingTo Accelerate For PassingADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) - IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OperationActivating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)To ActivateTo Set a Desired SpeedTo CancelTo Turn OffTo Resume SpeedTo Vary the Speed SettingSetting the Following Distance in ACCAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) MenuDisplay Warnings and MaintenancePrecautions While Driving with ACCGeneral InformationREAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED OVERHEAD CONSOLE Courtesy/Reading LightsSunglasses StorageGARAGE DOOR OPENER - IF EQUIPPED Programming HomeLinkGate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingUsing HomeLinkReprogramming a Single HomeLink ButtonSecurityTroubleshooting TipsGeneral InformationPOWER SUNROOF - IF EQUIPPED Opening Sunroof - ExpressClosing Sunroof - ExpressPinch Protect FeaturePinch Protect OverrideVenting Sunroof - ExpressSunshade OperationWind BuffetingSunroof MaintenanceIgnition Off OperationSunroof Fully ClosedELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OffCUP HOLDERS Front Seat Cup HoldersRear Seat Cup Holders STORAGE Console FeaturesCargo AreaLOAD LEVELING SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) - IF EQUIPPED Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) DisplaysOil Change RequiredTrip FunctionsCompass DisplayTelephone - If EquippedNavigation - If EquippedPersonal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast SignalsTwo Types of SignalsElectrical DisturbancesAM ReceptionFM ReceptionSALES CODE REN - MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio (If Equipped)Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) (If Equipped)Clock Setting ProcedureSALES CODE REQ - AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)Notes On Playing MP3/WMA FilesLIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)SALES CODE RER - MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions - Satellite RadioOperating Instructions - Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) (If Equipped)Clock Setting ProcedureSALES CODE RES - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio PlayNotes On Playing MP3 FilesLIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)SATELLITE RADIO (RSC) - IF EQUIPPED (REQ AND RES RADIOS ONLY) System Activation Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ENS/SID)Selecting Satellite ModeSatellite AntennaReception QualityOperating Instructions - Satellite ModeOperating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If Equipped)Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES) (If Equipped)VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) - IF EQUIPPED Connecting the iPodControlling the iPod using Radio ButtonsPlay ModeList or Browse ModeREMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS - IF EQUIPPED CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System Automatic Temperature Control - If Equipped Operating TipsREAR WINDOW FEATURES Electric Rear Window DefrosterSTARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic TransmissionNormal Starting (Tip Start)Extremely Cold Weather (below -20 degrees F or -29 degrees C)If Engine Fails To StartAfter StartingENGINE BLOCK HEATER - IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission - General InformationBrake/Transmission Shift Interlock System4 Speed Automatic Transmission5 Speed Automatic TransmissionAUTOSTICK - IF EQUIPPED Autostick OperationALL WHEEL DRIVE - IF EQUIPPED DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES AccelerationTractionDRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing/Rising WaterShallow Standing WaterPARKING BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM Anti-Lock Brake System - If EquippedPOWER STEERING MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) - 5.7L Engine Only TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) - IF EQUIPPED BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS) - IF EQUIPPED ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) IF EQUIPPED Synchronizing ESPESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator and ESP/TCS Indicator LightsTIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Loading and Tire PressureTIRES - GENERAL INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation PressuresRadial-Ply TiresCompact Spare Tire - If EquippedLimited Use Spare - If EquippedTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsLife of TireReplacement TiresAlignment And BalanceSELF-SEALING TIRES - IF EQUIPPED TIRE CHAINS SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) IF EQUIPPED Base System - If EquippedPremium System - If EquippedGeneral InformationFUEL REQUIREMENTS 2.7L Engine3.5L and 5.7L EnginesReformulated GasolineGasoline/Oxygenate BlendsMMT In GasolineMaterials Added to FuelFuel System CautionsCarbon Monoxide WarningsADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageVEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Certification LabelGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)OverloadingLoadingTRAILER TOWING Common Towing DefinitionsTrailer Hitch ClassificationTrailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)Trailer and Tongue WeightTowing RequirementsTowing TipsRECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground)WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Preparations For JackingJack Location/Spare Tire StowageJacking and Changing a Tire Compact Spare TireWheel Cover or Center Cap Installation (If Required)JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEYTOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground)TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLYMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM - OBD II Loose Fuel Filler CapEMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS REPLACEMENT PARTS DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilEngine Oil FilterDrive Belts - Check Condition and TensionSpark PlugsEngine Air Cleaner FilterFuel FilterCatalytic ConverterMaintenance-Free BatteryAir Conditioner MaintenanceA/C Air Filter - If EquippedPower Steering - Fluid CheckFront and Rear Suspension Ball JointsSteering LinkageBody LubricationWindshield Wiper BladesWindshield Washers/Headlight Washers - If EquippedExhaust SystemCooling SystemHoses and Vacuum/Vapor HarnessesFuel SystemBrake SystemAutomatic TransmissionAll Wheel Drive (AWD) - If EquippedFront and Rear Wheel BearingsAppearance Care and Protection from CorrosionCleaning the Center Console Cup HoldersFUSES (POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS) Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center)Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center)VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, Park/Turn Light, Inner Park Light, and Outer Park Light - 300 ModelsLow Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and Park/Turn Light - 300CBackup Light, Side Marker Light, and Tail/Stop Turn Light - 300 ModelsTail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, and Backup Light - 300C ModelsLicense LightFLUIDS AND CAPACITIES FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS EngineChassisMAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Required Maintenance IntervalsIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The AppointmentPrepare A ListBe Reasonable With RequestsIF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) MOPAR PARTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In CanadaPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction GradesTemperature GradesINDEX